You are on page 1of 526

FUSION 640M

PROGRAMMING

COURSE MANUAL
640M PROGRAMMING COURSE CONTENTS

DAY 1

1. Control Details…. ...................................................... 1-1


The Co-ordinate System............................................. 1-7
Tool File..................................................................... 1-13
Program File............................................................... 1-23
Component No 1 ........................................................ 1-27
New Program Creation............................................... 1-31
The COMMON UNIT ............................................... 1-35
The W.P.C UNIT ....................................................... 1-43
The FACE MILL UNIT............................................. 1-47
The TAPPING UNIT................................................. 1-57
The BORING UNIT .................................................. 1-71
The END UNIT.......................................................... 1-83
The CHECK Screen ................................................... 1-89
The SHAPE CHECK Screen ..................................... 1-95
The TOOL PATH CHECK Screen............................ 1-101
Component No 2 ........................................................ 1-111
The ROUGH COUNTER BORE UNIT .................... 1-115

C-1
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CONTROL DETAILS

1-1
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-2
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Q.What is Fusion?

MAZATROL FUSION 640

Control Basic Hardware


Construction

CNC SIDE PC SIDE

64 BIT RISC CHIP


32 BIT - 486DX4
(O/S - VX WORKS)
100MHz
MEMORY (SRAM)
16MB RAM
512KB - FOR TOOL MEMORY
DATA/PARAMETER
ETC.
HARD DRIVE - 2GB
MEMORY (DRAM) WORK PROGRAMS
1MB - WORK SYSTEM FILES ETC.
PROGRAMS

ISA BUS

NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS - STANDARD 256

A. The integration of a P.C. and a C.N.C.

P.C. (A personal computer.)


C.N.C. (A computer numerical control)

1-3
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The MAZATROL FUSION 640M


CONTROL LAYOUT

FUNCTION
KEYS

THE
MOUSE

THE
NUMERIC THE INPUT
KEYS KEY

THE PAGE
THE
KEYS
ALPHA
KEYS

THE CURSOR
KEYS

THE TAB THE


KEY WINDOWS
KEY

1-4
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The DISPLAY MAP

This screen is an aid to finding your way around the various displays on the
Mazatrol fusion system.

To access this screen:

Select from the Menu options DISPLAY MAP

Using the cursor keys, highlight the display you wish to go to, then press the
INPUT key. The screen will change to the required display.

1-5
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-6
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE COORDINATE SYSTEM

1-7
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-8
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE CO-ORDINATE SYSTEM

In the preparation of the program, a system of coordinates is used for


introducing the position of the machining and the form of the machining.
The system of coordinates for a machining centre consists of three axes which
cross the reference zero point at right angles.
Any point found in this system of coordinates can be defined by the value of the
coordinates in the 3 axes (X, Y and Z).

There are two seperate ranges of coordinates:


- Machine coordinates system
- Workpiece coordinates system
Z axis

Reference point zero


X axis

Y axis

M3P001

Fig. -1 Coordinates system

1-9
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Machine Coordinates System

The machine moves in its own system of coordinates called the Machine
Coordinates System. A point of reference in this system is known as
machine ORIGIN point.
Generally, the machine coordinates system has the machining zone on the side
of the minus (negative) direction from the machine zero point.

MACHINE
ORIGIN
POSITION

Y-
Z-
X-

Note: The following figure represents the case of Vertical Machining Centre.

1-10
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Workpiece Coordinates System


If the program were prepared on the basis of the Machine Coordinates System, the
entering of the machining positional data to produce a component is very
complex, tedious and inflexible.
Consequently, a secondary reference point is taken in the machine coodinates
system for preparing the program.
The point thus taken is called the WORKPIECE ZERO POINT, and the program
coordinates are taken from this point. This is known as the WORKPIECE
COORDINATE SYSTEM.

Z+
Y+ X+

The example below shows WORKPIECE COORDINATE positioning


to specify points on the plan view of a component.(Datum on bottom
left of workpiece). P3
P4

P5
X POSITION Y POSITION
80 P1 0 0
60
P2 100 0
P3 100 80
P1 P2 P4 0 80
P5 40 60
40
100

1-11
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Machine coordinates system

Machine coordinates system

Workpiece coordinates system

<Model V, double column type> NM210-00511 <Model V> NM210-00512

Machine coordinates system

Workpiece coordinates system


NM210-00513
<Model H>

Note: The above relationship may slightly differ according to the type of machine being used.

Fig. -2 Machine coordinates system and workpiece coordinates system

1-12
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE TOOL FILE DISPLAY

1-13
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-14
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Screen Display of End Mill Tool File

1. Press Display Map menu.

2. Move cursor to Tool File and press < INPUT >

This will then display the Tool File screen for End Mills as shown on the
following picture.

1-15
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool File Display for End Mills.

1. [No.] This represents the Registration number of the entered


tool.
2. [NOM- ∅] The nominal diameter of the tool.
3. [TOOL ID CODE] A letter suffix used to distinguish between tools of
the same diameter.
4. [MAT.] Selection of the tool material. This can be selected
from the menu keys available at the bottom of the
screen.
5. [DEPTH] This represents the maximum depth of cut that can be
taken in any one roughing pass.
6. [TEETH] This represents the number of teeth of the cutter.

Depth of Cut (Per Pass)


NOM- ∅

1-16
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Tool File Display for Face Mills.

1. Press FACEMILL menu.

1-17
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The tool file information for the Face Mill is similar to that of an End Mill.

1. [No.] This represents the Registration number of the entered


tool.
2. [NOM- ∅] The nominal diameter of the tool.
3. [TOOL ID CODE] A letter suffix used to distinguish between tools of
the same diameter.
4. [MAT.] Selection of the tool material. This can be selected
from the menu keys available at the bottom of the
screen.
5. [DEPTH] This represents the maximum depth of cut that can be
taken in any one roughing pass.
6. [TEETH] This represents the number of teeth of the cutter.

There is one additional question required: -

7. [ANG.] This represents the approach angle of the tool.

ANG

NOM- ∅

1-18
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool File Display for Chamfer Mills.

2. Press CHAMFER CUTTER menu.

1-19
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1. [No.] This represents the Registration number of the entered


tool.
2. [NOM- ∅] The nominal diameter of the tool.
3. [TOOL ID CODE] A letter suffix used to distinguish between tools of
the same diameter.
4. [MAT.] Selection of the tool material. This can be selected
from the menu keys available at the bottom of the
screen.
5. [MIN- ∅] This represents the minimum diameter of the cutter.

6. [TEETH.] This represents the number of teeth of the cutter.

7. [ANG.] This represents the approach angle of the tool.

Ang

Min-Ø
Nom-Ø

1-20
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Tool File Display for Ball End Mills.

3. Press BALL ENDMILL menu.

1-21
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1. [No.] This represents the Registration number of the entered


tool.
2. [NOM- ∅] The nominal diameter of the tool.
3. [TOOL ID CODE] A letter suffix used to distinguish between tools of
the same diameter.
4. [MAT.] Selection of the tool material. This can be selected
from the menu keys available at the bottom of the
screen.
5. [DEPTH] This represents the maximum depth of cut that can be
taken in any one roughing pass.
6. [TEETH] This represents the number of teeth of the cutter.

Depth of Cut per pass

Nom-Ø

1-22
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE PROGRAM FILE

1-23
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-24
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM FILE

.
1. WORK No. Work number of a registered program. Up to a maximum of 8
digits can be used, [M] in blue = Mazatrol, [E] in red = EIA/ISO.
2. BLOCK. Number of Mazatrol blocks in the program. Up to a maximum of
250, Mazatrol blocks can be entered to any one Mazatrol program.
3. NAME. Name of the program. Up to a maximum of 16, (48 optional),
alphanumeric can be used.
4. MEMORY USED Percentage of the available Block storage area used.
5. PAGE. The number of the page currently being displayed / The total number
of pages available.

The above screen display of the program file is based on a standard Memory control
where the Mazatrol specification is as follows:

Maximum number of programs = 256


Maximum number of blocks = 13,520

The specification for EIA/ISO is as follows:


Storage Capacity: 1,650m (5,412.50-ft) paper tape.

1-25
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-26
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.1

1-27
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-28
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-29
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 1- PROGRAM LISTING


UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 20. 1 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 5. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 80. A ? ? XBI-S * 2.2 56 159 1.05 8
2 F-MILL 125. A ? ? YBI * * 87.5 159 0.84 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 100. 100. 0. C 20.

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-ø PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


3 TAPPING UN 5S-18 7.938 1.411 15. 0.6 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 7.916 * * * 90° * 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 6.7 6.7 18.82 0. 100 PCK1T 3.35 27 0.184 8
3 TAP UN 5S-18 7.937 15. * * FIX P1.411 9 1.411 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR 0. 50. 50. 90. * 30. * * 4 * * * 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


4 BORE T1 30. 14. 1. 5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 24. 24. 15. 0. 100 DRILT12. 27 0.257 8
3 BOR BAR 28.5 28.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.25 97 0.131 8
4 BOR BAR 29.5 29.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 102 0.093 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 999. 0. 30. 14. * C 1. 512 0.2 8
6 BOR BAR 30. 30. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.25 119 0.067 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 50. 50. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


5 END 0 0 1 0. 0. 0. * * *

1-30
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

NEW PROGRAM CREATION

1-31
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-32
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

NEW PROGRAM CREATION

In order to start a new program, perform the following procedure:

1.

Select F1 key to view the main screen menus

2.

Press the program menu key to display the program screen.

Enter your Work No., having checked for adequate storage space
And the originality of the proposed program number from the
Program file window.
1-33
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4.

Select Mazatrol Program menu key to register the new program in


Mazatrol format.(Alternatively EIA/ISO ).

1-34
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE COMMON UNIT

1-35
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-36
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE COMMON UNIT

The Common unit is the first unit in any Mazatrol program. (UNo 0)
This concerns the unit which is always set at the head of the program at the time
of the programming.
Data for the common unit are set on the PROGRAM display in creating mode.
When creating a new program, only the common unit line shown below is
displayed on the upper part of the screen.

UNo. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0

Cursor position Entering


Specify the material of the workpiece using the menu key to perform the automatic
determination of the cutting conditions.
The names of workpiece materials in the menu are the same as those which are listed on the
CUTTING CONDITION (W.-MAT./T.-MAT.) display.
Also, these names of workpiece materials are already registered in the system and they are
MAZAK-recommended ones.
MAT To register new workpiece material names, refer to Section 8-1, “CUTTING CONDITION
(W.-MAT./T.-MAT.) Display,” of the relevant Operating Manual.
Example:

FC FCD S45C SCM SUS AL CU >>>

Specify the position on the Z axis (Z plane) as an absolute value from the workpiece zero point
in order to prevent interference of the tool edge with the workpiece or a fastening device in case
of movement on the X and Y axes. Without specification, an alarm will be displayed.
These data will be used in the same way in the case of the use of the auxiliary coordinates
system.
In automatic operating mode, this height is taken into consideration for the positioning of the
tool.

INITIAL-Z Initial point Z

Workpiece
zero point

M3P077

1-37
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Cursor position Entering
Specify the mode of movement from the initial point to the ATC position at the time of ATC.

<Independent movement on each axis: 0> <Simultaneous movement on all axes: 1>

ATC ATC
position position

Z
ATC MODE
Initial point Initial point
Y
Simultaneous movement on X, Y
Movement on Z axis only, then X
movement on X and Y axes and Z axes
M3P078

The data of the ATC MODE are only valid in the related program. Consequently, during the
execution of the sub-program, the movement is done in conformity with the data entered in the
ATC MODE in the sub-program.

Note: In the case of designation of 1 (simultaneous movement), check that the tool does not
interfere with the workpiece or with the fastening device of the workpiece.
Specify the multi-workpiece machining mode.

MULTI MULTI OFFSET


OFF 5 2 TYPE

- MULTI OFF: Ordinary machining (machining of one workpiece)


- MULTI 5 * 2: Machining of several workpieces (for machining with reference to jig)
- OFFSET TYPE:Machining of several workpieces deviated arbitrarily
(1) MULTI 5 * 2
- When pressing the menu key MULTI 5 * 2, enter data in the columns MULTI FLAG,
MULTI MODE PITCH-X and
PITCH-Y with numeric keys and press the input key.
(2) OFFSET TYPE
By fixing the amount of X, Y offset for each workpiece, it is possible to machine the
workpieces arranged in arbitrary positions. Therefore, unlike the case of MULTI 5 * 2,
there are no restrictions that the workpieces must be arranged in an equidistant manner or in
2 rows/5 rows.
Press the menu key OFFSET TYPE and enter each coordinate as offset data of the
common unit, as an amount of offset with relation to the programmed workpiece zero
point.

1-38
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Cursor position Entering

UNo. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y

0 S45C 50 0 OFFSET TYPE


OFS X Y th Z
1 X1 Y1 th1 Z1
2 X2 Y2 th2 Z2
3 X3 Y3 th3 Z3

It is possible to set a maximum of 10 OFS numbers.


The relation between the position of the workpiece and the coordinates is as follows:

- Case of th = 0

Y direction X2 2

X3 3

1 Y2
X1
Y3

(MULTI Y1
MODE)
X direction
Workpiece zero point (WPC)

M3P079

- Case of designation of th

y 3

2
Y3 x’
X2
y’
X3
Y2

Y1
X1

M3P080

1-39
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Cursor position Entering
Specify the execution or non-execution of the machining for each workpiece in case of MULTI
5 * 2.
Non-execution ............... 0
Execution ....................... 1
A maximum of 10 identical workpieces can be machined with only one program.
The relation of the value of 10 figures in the MULTI FLAG column and the workpiece
positions is as follows:

MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y


5 * 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 7 8 9 10
MULTI FLAG Y direction
1 2 3 4 5

X direction M3P081

Example of entering:

Position of workpieces
MULTI FLAG
6 8 10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

2 4 10 8 6 4 2

M3P082

Specify the pitch in the directions X and Y between the located workpieces in case of MULTI 5
2.

6 7 8 9 10
Y direction Reference workpiece
PITCH-Y
PITCH-X 1 2 3 4 5

PITCH-Y
PITCH-X
X direction
Workpiece zero point M3P083

The workpieces are arranged with an equal distance of the values PITCH-X, PITCH-Y from the
position of the reference workpiece.
Note: Minus data cannot be entered in the articles PITCH-X, -Y.

1-40
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Note 1: The multi-workpiece machining with the manual program


mode unit requires the absolute position command of the three axes in the
first sequene.

Note 2: The M code specified at the end of the tool sequence is valid
for all workpieces with in the multi-workpiece system.
The M code’s entered in a M code unit are only executed once.

Note 3: Machining prioritys are valid for multi-workpiece


machining.

1-41
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-42
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE W.P.C. UNIT

1-43
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-44
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE W.P.C. UNIT

This unit serves to specify the distance from the machine zero point to the
workpiece zero point.
When data setting for the common unit has been completed the following menu
is displayed..

UNo. UNIT ADD WPC X Y th Z 4


1. WPC-

Cursor position Entering


Several basic coordinates systems (WPC) can be specified in one program.
They are differentiated each other by their numbers.
UNIT
Permissible input range (0 to 99)
No input is required,as the the WPC number is for personnal refferance only.
Set data in this item only if you are to use additional basic coordinate data
(coordinates A to J) and workpiece offset data (G54 to G59), instead of using
ADD. WPC
the normal WPC data.
(option)
If data is set, the modal status display of the POSITION display will remain
set to G54.1 P0 and external workpiece offsets will not be displayed exactly.
Enter the X coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates
X system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the Y coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates
Y system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the angle formed by the machine coordinates system and the workpiece
th coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±999.999)
Enter the Z coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates
Z system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the 4th axis coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine
4 coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)

1-45
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Note: During the execution of a MAZATROL program, the modal


status display on the POSITION display will remain set to
G54.1 P0.
To begin with, just enter each column with a value of zero.
The operator normally enters in the correct values when the component is set
up for machining.

MACHINE
ORIGIN
POSITION

Y(-) WPC
PC
) W
-
X(
Z(-) WPC

WORKPIECE
ORIGIN
POSITION

WPC-4 Y
X

X
ROTATIONAL
AXIS Y
WPC-U
MACHINE 0 POINT

WPC 0 POINT
1-46
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

FACE MILL UNIT

1-47
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-48
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Selection of Face Mill Unit

1. Press FACE MACHINING

2. Press FACE MIL menu

1-49
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Face Mill Unit. (FACE MIL)
This unit is selected to machine a workpiece flatly on the surface by the use
of a face mill type tool.

FACE MILL unit Tool Sequence


Workpiece zero point
Shape sequence entered

Finishing Roughing

DEPTH
..................
..................
..................
..................
SRV-Z ..................
Face mill Face mill
FIN-Z
(for roughing) (for finishing)

M3P247 M3P248

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACEMIL 0 5. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦

[DEPTH] DIST: WPC Z0 TO FIN. SURFACE ?


This is the distance from the workpiece Z zero to the finished machined surface.
(This can only be entered as a positive value).

[SRV-Z] Z AXIS STOCK REMOVAL ?


This represents the amount of material in the Z-axis to be removed above the
finished-machined surface. (This can only be entered as a positive value).

[BTM] BOTTOM FACE ROUGHNESS <MENU> ?


Choose the required surface finish from the menus available. Selection of codes 1 to
3 will only develop Roughing type operations with no Finishing Allowances.
Selection of codes 4 to 9 will develop both Roughing and Finishing operations. See
the table below for the Surface finishes.

[FIN-Z] FINISH ALLOWANCE Z ?


This is the amount of material left on in the Z-axis for the finishing operation. (This
value will be automatically calculated if surface finish codes 4 to 9 have been
selected). However, if surface finish codes 1 to 3 are selected, then the value will be
automatically set as zero.

1-50
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Surface Finish Table.

SRF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
µm Ra 25.0 12.5 6.3 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1
µm R Max 100.0 50.0 25.0 12.5 6.3 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4
µ″ Ra 1000 500 250 125 63 32 16 8 4
µ″ R Max 4000 2000 1000 500 250 125 63 32 16
Finishing 0 0 0 0.6 0.42 0.294 0.205 0.144 0.1
Allowance

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACEMIL 0 5. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦
Sno. TOOL NOM-∅ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 F-MILL 80.A ? ? XBI-S ♦ 2.2 56 159 1.05 8
F2 F-MILL 125.A ? ? YBI ♦ ♦ 87.5 159 0.84 8

TOOL SEQUENCE DATA FOR FACEMILL CUTTER

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


Input the nominal tool diameter for the operation. Milling tools must be selected
from the TOOL FILE library and will therefore need to have been entered into the
TOOL FILE prior to selection within the program.

[NOM-∅] TOOL FILE CODE ?


Input the tool suffix code allocated alongside the nominal diameter on the TOOL
FILE page to distinguish between tools of the same diameter but of different
configuration.

[NO.] MACHINING PRIORITY No. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[APRCH-X] APPROACH POINT X, AUTO → <MENU> ?


[APRCH-Y] APPROACH POINT Y, AUTO → <MENU> ?
The approach point is the initial X and Y absolute co-ordinate position from where
the centre of the tool starts its cutting feed. (This point is automatically determined
by the control by selecting the AUTO SET menu available.)

1-51
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[TYPE] CUTTING DIRECTION <MENU> ?
Select the desired tool path direction from the menu available. (The diagrams below
illustrate the X-axis directions. The same principles can be applied to the Y-axis
cutting directions.)

X BI-DIR X UNI-DIR

X BI-DIR SHORT X BI-DIR


ARCSHORT

[DEP-Z] DEPTH OF CUT ?


This value determines the Roughing depth of cut per pass in the Z-axis. The value is
automatically set by selecting the AUTO SET menu available. It is not possible to
exceed this value as the maximum Roughing depth of cut per pass is determined by
the value that has been registered against this tool within the TOOL FILE library.
(This is not applicable to finishing tool sequence data).

[WID-R] WIDTH OF CUT ?


This value determines the width of cut per pass in the X/Y axis. If the AUTO SET
menu has been selected, the control will return a value that represents 70% of the
nominal cutter diameter (set by parameter). It is not possible to set a value greater
than the tool diameter.

1-52
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[C-SP] CUTTING SPEED, AUTO→ <MENU> ?


The speed, (m/min or ft/min) at which the outer circumference of the tool moves.
The relationship between the revolutions per minute and the circumferential speed is
given by the following equation:

For Metric set-up: -

N = V x 1000 V = D x N x 3.142(π) N = Revs per Minute


3.142(π) x D 1000 V = Surface Speed m/min
D = Tool Diameter mm

For Imperial set-up: -

N= V x 12 V = D x N x 3.142(π)
3.142(π) x D 12

[FR] FEEDRATE, AUTO→ <MENU> ?


The FEEDRATE, (mm/rev or inches/rev) is the distance through which the work is
cut during one revolution of the tool.

[M] M CODE ?
There are 2 columns into which M CODES can be programmed. The 1st column can
be programmed with values up to 2 digits. The 2nd column can be programmed with
values up to 3 digits.

1-53
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
After the setting of the tool sequence data within the Face Milling unit, the pattern
data menus shown below will be displayed.

PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>?


SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE
END

Press the menu key SQUARE.


• Data setting in shape sequence for SQUARE

FI PTN P1X/C P1Y/C P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4


G X Y
1 SQR x1 y1 x3 y3 C1 C2 C3 C4
(R1) (R2) (R3) (R4)

Cursor Description
position
P1X/CX Enter the X coordinate of start point (x1).
P1Y/CY Enter the Y coordinate of start point (y1).
P3X/R Enter the X coordinate of diagonal point (x3).
P3Y Enter the Y coordinate of diagonal point (y3).
Select a machining form at corner 1. Corner chamfering distance (C)
or corner radius of a circular arc (R).
R-machining: Enter the numeric value directry. ........ Corner R
C-chamfering: ............................................................. Press the menu
CN1 key CORNER CHAMFER and
enter a numeric value. ................................ Corner C
Pressing the menu key CORNER CHAMFER makes the
menu display reverse and entering a numeric value will
cause that menu display status to become normal.
CN2 Enter the same data as those for corner 1.
CN3
CN4

1-54
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The shape sequence data for the SQUARE definition can be entered by using the
reference diagram below.

Start Position for


Machining (Corner 2)
(Corner 1 X,Y)

Workpiece
Zero Point
(Corner 4) Diagonal Point
(Corner 3 X,Y)

In our example the workpiece zero point is located on the corner of the workpiece (at
Corner number 4). Therefore the shape sequence for programming example 1 will be
entered as the following: -

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACEMIL 0 5. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦
Sno. TOOL NOM-∅ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 F-MILL 80.A ? ? XBI-S ♦ 2.2 56 159 1.05 8
F2 F-MILL 125.A ? ? YBI ♦ ♦ 87.5 159 0.84 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3/Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 100. 100. 0. C20.

Press the SHAPE END menu to complete the Unit.

PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>?


SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE
END

1-55
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-56
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

TAPPING UNIT

1-57
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-58
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Selection of Tapping Unit.

1. Press POINT MACHINING

2. Press TAPPING menu

3. Choose the type of Tap from the menus below

4. Press the menu NOM-∅ Select

1-59
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

5. The Unified Thread window will appear. Cursor to the selected thread size,
then press input.
(This window is not valid for Metric Thread selection).

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-∅ PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


3 TAPPING UN 5S-18 7.937 1.411 15. 0.6 0

MAJOR- O

CHMF
PITCH TAP-DEP

1-60
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[NOM-] TYPE OF TAP ?


This represents the form of the Tap. Setting of the nominal diameter will enable
automatic setting of the actual diameter, pitch and the amount of chamfering.

[MAJOR-∅] ACTUAL DIAMETER OF TAP ?


This is the exact diameter of the tap size. The control sets the actual diameter
automatically based on the tap type information.

[PITCH] PITCH ?
This represents the thread pitch of the tap. The control will set the pitch
automatically based on the tap type information. However, if this is not the
required pitch, set the pitch manually using the data entry keys and then press the
[INPUT] key.

[TAP-DEP] TAPPING DEPTH ?


This is the amount of FULL THREADING DEPTH that is required.

[CHMF] CHAMFER WIDTH ?


This represents the amount of chamfer required at the top of the hole. It is based
on the nominal diameter of the drill that is being used. The control sets this
automatically based on the tap type. However, if a different amount of chamfering
is required, set the width manually using the data entry keys and then press the
[INPUT] key.

[CHP] CHIP VAC. CLEANER < Y:1, N:0 > ?


This enables the use of a special vacuum tool for swarf removal before the tapping
of the hole. Enter 1 if this tool is required or enter 0 if this tool is not required.

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-∅ PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


3 TAPPING UN 5S-18 7.937 1.411 15. 0.6 0
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20 7.915 ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 6.7 6.7 18.82 0 100 DRIL T3.35 27 0.104 8
3 TAP UN 5S-18 7.937 15 TAP ♦ FIX P1.411 9 1.411 8

1-61
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the Centre Drill

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically select the size of the centre drill to be used
(Parameter Setting). If a different size of centre drill is required, set the diameter
manually by using the data entry keys and then press the [INPUT] key.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Optionally, input the suffix code letter to distinguish between different
configuration centre drills of the same diameter. These tools are not registered in a
TOOL FILE library within the memory of the control, unlike that of milling tools.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[HOLE-∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically set the chamfer diameter to be machined with this
tool. If a different chamfer diameter is required, set the diameter manually by using
the data entry keys and then press the [INPUT] key.

[RGH] CUTTER ANGLE ?


This represents the included angle of the centre drill. The included angle can be set
to 90° or 118° only, selected from the menus available.
NOTE: - Centre Drills used by the control are assumed to be N.C. type spot drills.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

1-62
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the Drill

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically select the size of the drill to be used. If a different
size of drill is required, set the diameter manually by using the data entry keys and
then press the [INPUT] key.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Optionally, input the suffix code letter to distinguish between different
configuration drills of the same diameter. These tools are not registered in a TOOL
FILE library within the memory of the control, unlike that of milling tools.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[HOLE-∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically set the hole diameter that is being machined with this
tool. If the nominal diameter of the drill is changed, then enter the hole diameter to
be the same.

[HOLE DEP] HOLE DEPTH ?


This value represents the depth of the full diameter of the drill. This is automatically
set by the control to allow for the taper lead of the tap and to ensure clearance
between the bottom of the tap and the full diameter of the drilled hole.
The control assumes a blind hole situation on the tapping unit.

[PRE-DIA] FEEDRATE REDUCTION DISTANCE ?


This represents a distance over which the feedrate can be altered when the point of
the drill nears the bottom of the hole.

1-63
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[PRE-DEP] BOTTOM CUTTING FEEDRATE (%) ?


This is the coefficient (%) of the programmed feedrate at which the drill feeds over
the reduction distance.

[RGH] TYPE OF DRILLING CYCLE < MENU > ?


The control will automatically select the drilling cycle for this operation. However,
if a different cycle is required, then choose the most appropriate cycle from the
menus available.

Drilling Cycle = Drilling to depth with no peck


Pecking Cycle 1 = Drilling to depth with an intermittent chip break relief. With
this cycle the pecking depth remains constant.
Pecking Cycle 2 = Drilling to depth with an intermittent tool retraction out of
the hole to clear out the swarf. . With this cycle the pecking
depth remains constant.
Decrem.
Pecking Cycle 1 = Drilling to depth with an intermittent chip break relief. With
this cycle the pecking depth will reduce.
Decrem.
Pecking Cycle 2 = Drilling to depth with an intermittent tool retraction out of
the hole to clear out the swarf. With this cycle the pecking
depth will reduce.

[DEPTH] DEPTH OF CUT ?


For Pecking Cycles 1 and 2, this value represents the drill pecking depth of cut per
pass, which will be set automatically by the control.
For Decrem. Pecking Cycles 1 and 2, this value represents the depth of the first
peck distance. The amount that each peck thereafter reduces by is set by parameter
data.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

1-64
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the Tap

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically select the size of the tap to be used. If a different
size of tap is required, set the diameter manually by using the data entry keys and
then press the [INPUT] key.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Optionally, input the suffix code letter to distinguish between different
configuration drills of the same diameter. These tools are not registered in a TOOL
FILE library within the memory of the control, unlike that of milling tools.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[HOLE-∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically set the hole diameter that is being machined with this
tool. If the nominal diameter of the tap is changed, then enter the hole diameter to
be the same.

[HOLE DEP] HOLE DEPTH ?


This value represents the tapping depth of full thread that is automatically set by the
control.

[PRE-DIA] TYPE OF DRILLING CYCLE < MENU > ?


There are 3 types of cycles available for tapping: -

Tapping Cycle = Conventional Tapping, feed to depth, spindle reverse, feed


back to clearance plane.
Pecking Cycle 2 = For deep hole tapping, the depth of the hole can be tapped in
A series of peck depths. (Valid only for Synchronous
Tapping).
Planet Cycle = Tapping by the usage of a Drill/Tap type tool (Special Tool).

1-65
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[PRE-DEP] DEPTH OF CUT ? (If using Pecking Cycle 2)


This represents the pecking depth of cut for each pass. (Valid only for Synchronous
Tapping).

[PRE-DEP] DRILLING FEED (/REV) ? (If using Planet Cycle)


This represents the drilling feed per rev prior to the tapping sequence for the
drill/tap type tool (Special Tool).
[See Appendix for the explanation of this special cycle].

[RGH] DWELL TIME IN TAP CYCLE (SEC) ?


This sets the dwell time to be used for the tapping cycle if you are using a Tapper of
the floating type. The control will automatically display FIX dwell time, which
means that the dwell is set FIXed by a parameter.

[DEPTH] PITCH ?
This sets the pitch of the tap. It will be set automatically and will be used by the
control to calculate the feedrate for the tap.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

1-66
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Point Cutting Pattern Data

Shape Sequence.

Once the data for the machining unit and the sequence data for the tooling is
completed, the shape sequence must be entered.

Types of Point Machining patterns.

A. POINT B. LINE C. SQUARE D. GRID

E. CIRCLE F. ARC G. CHORD

M3P139

1-67
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

For setting the Point Cutting Pattern data, select CIRCLE from the menu displayed
below.

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-∅ PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


3 TAPPING UN 5S-18 7.937 1.411 15. 0.6 0
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR
M M
1 CTR-DR 20 7.915 ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 6.7 6.7 18.82 0 100 DRIL T3.35 27 0.104 8
3 TAP UN 5S-18 7.937 15 TAP ♦ FIX P1.411 9 1.411 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR 0 50. 50. 90. ♦ 30. ♦ ♦ 4 ♦ ♦ ♦ 1

1-68
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[Z] Z VALUE OF WORK SURFACE ?


This represents the distance from the workpiece Z zero point to the machining
surface

Workpiece zero point Machining surface Machining surface


Machining surface

(–)10 (+)10

Z=0 Z = –10 Z = 10

M3P140

[X] CIRCLE CENTRE X ?


This represents the absolute X co-ordinate of the centre of the pitch circle to be
drilled

[Y] CIRCLE CENTRE Y ?


This represents the absolute Y co-ordinate of the centre of the pitch circle to be
drilled

[AN1] ANGLE OF START PT FROM X AXIS ?


This represents the position where the 1st hole is to be machined. Angles are
measured from the +X axis (3o’clock position represents 0 degrees), CCW =
Positive value, CW = Negative value.

Specify the angle θ1 formed by the start point and the X axis.

There are two types of θ1


First hole to be
machined CCW direction: θ1 = 45°
(Start point) 4 5
θ1 (CCW) (to the left) (+) .......................
AN1
X axis

CW direction: θ’1 = –315° 3 1 5


θ’1 (CW) (to the right) (–) ....................
M3P162

1-69
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[T1] CIRCLE RADIUS R ?


This value represents the radius of the pitch circle.

[M] NUMBER OF HOLES ?


Specify the total number of holes to be machined.

[R] RETURN POSITION < INIT: 0, R:1 > ?


This represents the Z axis plane height that the tools will be returned to after the
machining of each hole. A setting of 0 means that the tools will be returned to the
safe Initial level that was specified at the head of the program (UNo. 0).
A setting of 1 means that the tools will be returned to a clearance level (R level) that
is just above the actual machining surface as set by a parameter. (See Diagram)

Initial Level/R Level

Return to initial point, then movement to the position Return to point R, then movement to the position
of the hole to be drilled next. of the hole to be drilled next.

Initial point Initial Point R


point
Workpiece Workpiece
clamping device clamping device

Hole to be Hole to be Hole to be Hole to be


drilled (1) drilled (2) drilled (1) drilled (2)

Rapid feed
Cutting feed

M3P141

If 0, the tool moves to the next hole at If 1, the tool moves to the next hole at
the height of the Initial Level the height of the R Level

1-70
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

BORING UNIT

1-71
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-72
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Selection of Boring Unit

1. Press POINT MACHINING

2. Press BORING menu

3. Select style of BORING unit required

1-73
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


4 BORE T1 30. 14. 1. 5

DIA

CHMF
DEPTH

[DIA] HOLE DIAMETER ?


This represents the finished bore size.

[DEPTH] HOLE DEPTH ?


This is the amount of full-bore depth required. Because this is a through boring
cycle, the control will ensure that the tools break through at the bottom by adding
onto the tool depths an allowance set by a parameter.

[CHMF] CHAMFER WIDTH ?


This represents the amount of chamfer required at the top of the hole.

[WAL] WALL ROUGHNESS < MENU > ?


Select the required surface finish from the menu available. If a surface roughness
of code 1 to 4 is used, the control will develop the tooling list with the
chamfering operation being performed last.
If a surface roughness code of 5 to 9 is used, the control will develop the tooling
list with the finish boring bar operation being performed last.
In addition, the number of boring bars that are automatically developed is
dependent on the surface roughness code that is selected.
E.g.
Surface Roughness Codes 1 and 2 = 1 Boring Bar.
Surface Roughness Codes 3 and 4 = 2 Boring Bars.
Surface Roughness Codes 5 to 9 = 3 Boring Bars.

1-74
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


4 BORE T1 30. 14. 1. 5
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20. 10. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 24. 24. 15. 0. 100 DRIL T12. 27 0.257 8
3 BOR BAR 28.5 28.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T2.25 97 0.131 8
4 BOR BAR 29.5 29.5 15. CYCLE1 0 0 T0.5 102 0.093 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 999. 0. 30. 14 ♦ C1. 512 0.2 8
6 BOR BAR 30 30. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T0.25 119 0.067 8

The explanation of the Tool Sequence data for the Centre Drill and Drill can be
found within the Tapping Unit section.

Tool Sequence Data for the Boring Bar

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary
for the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically select the size of the boring bar to be used. If a
different size of boring bar is required, set the diameter manually by using the data
entry keys and then press the [INPUT] key.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Optionally, input the suffix code letter to distinguish between different
configuration boring bars of the same diameter. These tools are not registered in a
TOOL FILE library within the memory of the control, unlike that of milling tools.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within
the program.

[HOLE-∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically set the hole diameter to be machined with this tool.
If the nominal diameter of the boring bar is changed, then enter the hole diameter
to be the same value.

1-75
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[HOLE DEP] HOLE DEPTH ?


This value represents the depth that will be used for the boring bar tool. The
control will automatically set the depth making an allowance for the boring bar to
break through at the bottom of the hole..

[PRE-DIA] BORING CYCLE < MENU > ?


The control will automatically select the boring cycle for this operation. However,
if a different boring cycle is required, then choose the appropriate cycle from the
menus available.
CYCLE 1: Feed to depth, orient the spindle at the bottom of the hole,
Retract in the X/Y axis, Rapid out.
CYCLE 2: Feed to depth, Rapid out.
CYCLE 3: Feed to depth, Feed out at a parameter set feed rate.

[PRE-DEP] TOP SURFACE TO FEED START PT. ?


This represents the distance from the top of the hole to where the tool starts its cut.

[RGH] BOTTOM FACE ROUGHNESS < MENU > ?


The control will automatically set the bottom roughness code according to the data
that was set in the first line of the unit. This will be set to 0 for the machining of a
through hole.

[DEPTH] WIDTH OF CUT ?


The control will automatically set the width of cut for the boring bar based on the
tools developed. However, if changes were made to the tool diameters, then the
necessary adjustments should be made on the width of cut for the tool for the
correct calculations of speeds and feeds.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

1-76
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the Chamfer Cutter

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary
for the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


Input the nominal tool diameter for the operation. Milling tools must be selected
from the TOOL FILE and will therefore need to have been described prior to
selection.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Input the suffix code letter that was allocated alongside the nominal diameter on
the TOOL FILE page to distinguish between chamfering tools of the same
diameter.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within
the program.

[HOLE-∅] TOOL DIAMETER INTERFERENCE ?


This represents the diametric value of an interference surface surrounding the hole
to be chamfered. The control will set this value automatically based on the
assumption that there is no interference (999 ∅), that is, a theoretical interference
of 999mm diameter. If there is interference surrounding the hole whilst
chamfering, enter the diametric value of the interference using the data entry keys
and then press the [INPUT] key. (See Diagram Below)

Charmfering if there is interference Chamfering if there is no interference

20

Hole-φ = 40 Hole-φ = 999

M3P112

1-77
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[HOLE-DEP] DIST: WPC Z0 TO CUT SURFACE ?


This value represents the distance from the top of the hole to the surface that is
being chamfered. This will be set automatically by the control according to the
data that was set in the first line of the unit.

[PRE-DIA] PREPARED HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will set the hole diameter automatically according to the data that was
set in the first line of the unit. The hole diameter is based on the finished bore size.

[PRE-DEP] PREPARED HOLE DEPTH ?


This value will be set automatically by the control according to the data that was
set in the first line of the unit. The prepared hole depth is based on the actual
material depth defined. The control will refer to this value when checking for tool
interference in the Z-axis.

[DEPTH] CHAMFER WIDTH ?


This value will be set automatically by the control according to the data that was
set in the first line of the unit. The chamfer width represents the radial amount
(X/Y) of chamfer that is to be machined around the hole.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

1-78
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Selecting Pattern Sequence Data

For setting the Point Cutting Pattern data, select POINT from the menu displayed
below.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


4 BORE T1 30. 14. 1. 5
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20. 10. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 24. 24. 15. 0. 100 DRIL T12. 27 0.257 8
3 BOR BAR 28.5 28.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T2.25 97 0.131 8
4 BOR BAR 29.5 29.5 15. CYCLE1 0 0 T0.5 102 0.093 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 999. 0. 30. 14 ♦ C1. 512 0.2 8
6 BOR BAR 30 30. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T0.25 119 0.067 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 50. 50. ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 0 0 1

[PTN] POINT CUTTING PATTERN < MENU > ?


From the menu available, select the pattern of holes that you want to machine. See
diagram from previous Tapping Unit.

1-79
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[Z] Z VALUE OF WORK SURFACE ?
This represents the distance from the Workpiece Z zero point to the machining
surface. See diagram from previous Tapping Unit.

[X] HOLE POSITION X ?


This value represents the absolute X co-ordinate value of the hole that is being
machined.

[Y] HOLE POSITION Y ?


This value represents the absolute Y co-ordinate value of the hole that is being
machined.

[P] PATH < XY: 0, Y→X: 1, X→Y: 2 > ?


Select the type of path that you wish to move the tool(s) to the hole position.
Entering a value of 0 will move the tool(s) simultaneously in both X and Y axes to
the hole co-ordinate. Entering a value of 1 will move the tool(s) to the Y axis co-
ordinate first, followed by the movement to the X axis co-ordinate.
Entering a value of 2 will move the tool(s) to the X axis co-ordinate first, followed
by the movement to the Y axis co-ordinate. (See Diagram Below)

Specify the tool path.


Simultaneous movement
Hole to be 0
Y P=1 drilled
on X and Y axes ..............
P=0
P Movement on Y axis, 1
P=2
then on X axis .................
X
Actual position of tool 2
Movement on X axis,
M3P144
then on Y axis .................

[O] OMIT SPT MACHINING < Y: 1, N: 0 > ?


Entering a value of 0 means that the tool(s) will move to the hole position and
machining will occur. Entering a value of 1 means that the tool(s) will move to the
hole position and no machining will occur.

[R] RETURN POSITION < INIT: 0, R: 1 > ?


This represents the Z axis plane height that the tools will be returned to after the
machining of each hole. A setting of 0 means that the tools will be returned to the
safe Initial level that was specified at the head of the program (UNo. 0).

1-80
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
A setting of 1 means that the tools will be returned to a clearance level (R level)
that is just above the actual machining surface as set by a parameter. See Diagram
from previous Tapping Unit.

1-81
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-82
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

END UNIT

1-83
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-84
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The END unit is used to indicate the end of the program. No further units can be
entered after the end proccess once it has been set into the program.

DATA SETTING IN END UNIT

UNO. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


END

CONTI. (CONTINUE Y:1 N:0)


Y:1 Spcifies if the program is to be repeated or not. If a 1 is entered then at the
end of the cycle the program will automatically return to the head of the program
and the cycle will start again. A value of 1 is normally entered in the END unit of
a sub-program. This also has the effect of making data entry for ATC and all
subsequent columns inapplicabe.
N:0 Entering a value of 0 means that at the completion of the cycle the program
will reset and processing will stop.

NUMBER (PARTS COUNTER Y:1 N:0)


Y:1 This will register a parts count at the end of cycle, this figure will appear on
the POSITION and COMMAND display in the counter area COUNTER 1 (100).
This value will increment by 1 each time the cycle runs. If the cycle runs in
continuous mode and the parts count target was set, the program will repeat until
the target value has been reached.
N:0 Entering a value of 0 means that at the end of of the cycle, the update of parts
Count

1-85
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

ATC (AUTO TOOL CHANGE N:0 Y:1 2:?)


N:0 Entering a vale of 0 causes the last tool used in the program cycle to remain in
the machine spindle and the machine to stop at a Machine cooordinate position
specified in the subsequent columns.
Y:1 This causes the last tool used in the program cycle to be returned to the
Magazine PRIOR to the machine stopping at Machine coordinate position
specified in the subsequent columns.
2:? Entering a value of 2 causes the last tool used in the program cycle to be
returned to the Magazine AFTER the machine moves to the Machine coordinate
position designated in the subsequent columns.

X/Y/Z/4
These are the positions that the Machine Axis move to at the end of the cutting
cycle, within the Machine coordinate system in the appropriate axis.

Cursor Description
position
The axes are moved in rapid feed to the position entered in the
articles X, Y, Z and 4 in the machine coordinates system at the end
of machining. The movement is done on Z axis, X axis, Y axis, 4th
axis and index table in this order. If 1 is set in the article ATC, X, Y
X/Y/Z/4 and Z axes are moved at the same time.
Note 1: If the coordinates are not specified, the axes movement
are not done.
Note 2: If 1 is set in the article CONTI., are displayed in the
articles X, Y, Z, 4 and ANGLE and no data can be set.
Enter the X coordinate of the machining end position in the machine
X coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the Y coordinate of the machining end position in the machine
Y coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the Z coordinate of the machining end position in the machine
Z coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
Enter the 4th axis coordinate of the machining end position in the
4 machine coordinates system.
Permissible input range (0 to ±99999.999)
NOTE:
If 0 is entered, the Machine will move to the first home position of the axis.

1-86
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

ANGLE: (ONLY APPROPRIATE TO HORIZONTAL MACHINES)


This is the angular position to which the machine table indexes at the end of the
cutting cycle.

TABLE INDEX DIRECTION: This is the direction in which the Machine table
indexes to the angular position specified in the previous column at the end of the
machining cycle. The options from the menu display are:

SHORTEST (AUTO): Index the shortest route to the designated angle.

CW: Index in a clockwise direction to the designated angle.

CCW: Index in a counter-clockwise direction to the designated angle.

1-87
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-88
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CHECK

1-89
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-90
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PLANE CHECK

The PLANE CHECK function provides a display facility for graphically checking
the shape described within the specific machining unit of the part program.

To access the PLANE CHECK area you must be in PROGRAM EDIT mode.
Position your cursor at the LEFT hand end of the Figure data row. The following
display will then be visible.

1.POINT MACHINING CYCLE

Select from the options in the menu.

Select either CONTINUE or STEP to display a plan view of the geometry.

1-91
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

OR

Select either CONTINUE or STEP to display a side of the geometry.

2.LINE & FACE MACHINING

When describing SQUARE, LINE or ARBITRY shapes within a LINE or FACE


machining unit you may also check Figure data.

1-92
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The display will change to show a plane view of the shape described

Select either CONTINUE or STEP to display a plan view of the geometry

NOTE:
The shape will be drawn in all cases providing that no alarms are generated from
the figure line data, contained within the specific machining unit.

1-93
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-94
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SHAPE CHECK

1-95
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-96
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The SHAPE CHECK function provides a display facility enabling you to
graphically check the shape of all machining unit figure line data, currently
defined within the program.

To access the shape check facility you must be in PROGRAM EDIT mode.
Position the cursor at the the beginning of a unit , the following display will then
be visible:

SELECT FROM

SHAPE CONTINUE:- The entire shape will be drawn in a continuous mode.

SHAPE UNIT:- The shape will be drawn in unit stages, progressing to the next
unit each time the key is pressed.

SHAPE STEP:- Using this option the shape will be drawn in a movement at a
time, progressing each time the key is pressed.

1-97
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
PLANE CHANGE

If it is desired to view the shape from different planes, press the menu PLANE
CHANGE.

The following menus will then be displayed. Select from the menu eg. XY-XZ
(Default on power on is XY)

The display will now show the amended view, by redrawing the shape you can
now see the required display, see below:

1-98
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3D, option will allow you to view in isometric view of the shape:

NOTE: Displayed on the Shape Check screen is information relative to coordinate


position, Work No. and unit information.

SCALE CHANGE

The size of the shape is drawn automatically to be accommodated centrally and


fill the whole display. However if the representation needs to be adjusted, press
the SCALE CHANGE menu.

1-99
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The following display can be seen, the current scale display appears at the top of
the screen (eg. 36.7mm). Once SCALE CHANGE has been selected the cursor
will appear in the centre of the component. To enlarge a particular area, use the
cursor control keys to move the cursor to the area to view then to zoom in type a
new scale for the Shape check and press input. The smaller the value the greater
the magnification.

Once this has been done you will then need to redraw the shape, it will now
appear at the new scale.
To retain this new scale for future instances press the STORE key from the
Menu bar, failure to do this will result in the drawing reverting back to auto-scale
when you next visit the SHAPE CHECK area.

3D SCALE CHANGE-NOTE:
Within the scale change area of a 3D Shape Check an additional option is
available allowing you to rotate the part as well as magnify, using the cursor
control keys. (The part is rotated in 5 degree increments.)

1-100
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

TOOL PATH CHECK

1-101
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-102
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The TOOL PATH function provides a display facility for graphically checking the
machining path of the tools for the prepared program.

The Tool Path display can only be accessed after the program (and any associated
sub-programs) have been completed and the END UNIT has been stated.

To perform a TOOL PATH CHECK follow the procedure below:

Select F1 Key to view the main screen menus.

Press the program menu key.

Select TOOL PATH from menu.

On entering the Tool Path display, select the PART SHAPE from the menu (see
over). This will in tern display the component description as specified in the
Figure data of the program. The shape will be drawn in XY view. This can be
changed by selecting PLANE CHANGE and selecting the appropriate aspect
from the menu.

The scale of the shape will auto-set so as to show all the machining path once the
Tool Path Check is commanded, you can change this by selecting SCALE
CHANGE and modifying.

1-103
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Once the drawing of the part is visible and if required has been manipulated so as
to see the maximum during the check, then select either PATH CONTINUE or
PATH STEP to view the tool path. The former will allow you to view the tool
path in continuous flow, whereas the latter allows you to step through the cycle.

PATH ERASE function is available to clear the Tool Path currently displayed.
This can be done during PATH CONTINUE or PATH STEP to enable you more
clearly to see the calculated cutter path.

1-104
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
On the Tool Path display RAPID movements of the tool centreline are displayed
as broken lines whilst CUTTING feed movements are displayed as continuous
lines.

It is the tool diameter that is represented on the display by it’s nominal diameter.
The view of end mills and face mills in the Z plane represent the depth of cut
being taken by the tool within the unit being checked. (There is no representation
of tool diameters or depths of cut, on the tool path display, for EIA/ISO
programs).

PROGRAM MONITOR will allow you


to view the current unit layout and will
indicate the current process being
checked, by highlighting the unit as seen
below.

RESTART: TOOL PATH


Is possible to perform a restart from any tool sequence, the procedure for doing
this is detailed below.
1. Press F12 key, whilst on the TOOL PATH screen.

2. Select from the menu PATH RESTART.

1-105
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Enter into the pop-up display the position within the Check where you want the
RESTART to take place :

SUB PROG. NO: Enter in the sub program work No. in which you wish to restart,
or if in the main program input past this question.

UNIT NO: Enter in the unit number to restart.

SEQUENCE NO: Input the tool sequence number to restart on.

REPEAT NO: If no entry is made here the default setting is once (Press input). If
a sub program has been called you may repeat the call a number of times.
----------------------------------------------------
3. Press F12 (Menu Select) key

4. Select either PATH CONTINUE or PATH STEP, the check will then start
from the point specified.
-----------------------------------------------------
SOLID MODE (not applicable for EIA/ISO programs)

To display a SOLID MODE toolpath check select the option from the menu
display.

1-106
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

A solid 3D workpiece is displayed of set dimensions, to customise this blank to


your requirements firstly activate from the pull-down menu at the top of the
screen SET-UP. Select CHANGE MATERIAL SIZE once this has been done the
following display will be active.

Enter into the BASE coordinate area the XY values to represent the distance from
workpiece datum (W.P.C) to bottom left corner of the material boundary. In Z
state the distance from workpiece datum (finished top surface) to lower boundary
of material.
The SIZE of the workpiece blank is then described INCREMENTALLY
in terms of XY&Z from the BASE position.

NOTE: This blank description can not be stored.

ENVIRONMENT SET-UP display can also be found on the SET-UP pull down
menu this allows you to customise the colour scheme is the solid graphics area.

----------------------------------

1-107
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Prior to or during Solid Mode graphics check you may select from the menu
options.

SELECT FROM

ZOOM IN/OUT: Using the cursor up/down keys will allow you to enlarge and
reduce the size of the workpiece, the default scale is autoset to show the
boundaries of the machining.

ROTATION: Allows you to take different views around the periphery of the
workpiece using cursor up/down and left/right keys.

MOVE: Can be selected to transpose the workpiece to a different area of the


screen, using the cursor control keys.

----------------------------------------
To start SOLID MODE Path check select either PATH CONTINUE or PATH
STEP from the menu options. The tool diameters are displayed as the cutters
nominal size as described in program.

1-108
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-109
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-110
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.2

1-111
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-112
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-113
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 2- PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 6. * 5 * 0.42 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 80. A ? ? XBI-S * 2.79 56. 147 0.783 8
F 2 F-MILL 125. A ? ? XBI * * 87.5 191 0.6 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -70. 50. 70. -50. C 25. R 15.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM DIA DEPTH


3 RGH CBOR 13. 5. 0. 4 9. 15.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 9. * * * 90° * 20 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 9. 15. 0. 100 DRILT 4.5 25 0.127 8
3 E-MILL 10. A 13. 5. 9. 4 T 6. 16 0.049 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR 0. 0. 0. 90. * 30. * * 6 * * * 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


4 BORE T1 28. 14. 0.5 4
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 22 0.14 8
2 DRILL 22. 22. 15. 0. 100 DRILT11. 25 0.228 8
3 BOR BAR 27. 27. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.5 86 0.126 8
4 BOR BAR 28. 28. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 97 0.09 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 999. 0. 28. 14. * C 0.5 512 0.2 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


5 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

1-114
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

RGH C’BORE UNIT

1-115
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

1-116
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Selection of Rough C’Bore Unit.

1. Press POINT MACHINING.

2. Press RGH CBOR menu.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM DIA DEPTH


3 RGH CBOR 13. 5. 0. 4 9. 15.

CB-DIA

CB-DEPTH

DEPTH
CHMF

DIA

1-117
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[CB-DIA] COUNTERBORE DIAMETER ?


This represents the finished diameter of the counterbore.

[CB-DEP] COUNTERBORE DEPTH ?


This represents the finished depth of the counterbore.

[CHMF] CHAMFER WIDTH ?


This represents the amount of chamfer required at the top of the counterbore.

[BTM] BOTTOM FACE ROUGHNESS < MENU > ?


Choose the required surface finish for the bottom face of the counterbore from the
menu available. If a surface roughness code of 4 or greater is selected and the tool
diameter is smaller than the counterbore diameter, the control will automatically
process a finishing cut on the counterbore face.

[DIA] HOLE DIAMETER ?


This represents the diameter of the inner hole (the hole below the bottom of the
counterbore face).

[DEPTH] HOLE DEPTH ?


This represents the amount of full diameter drill depth that is required for the inner
hole.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM DIA DEPTH


3 RGH CBOR 13. 5. 0. 4 9. 15.
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20 9. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 20 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 9. 15. 0 100 DRIL T4.5 25 0.127 8
3 E-MILL 10. A 13. 5. 9. ♦ 4 T6. 16 0.049 8

The explanation of the Tool Sequence data for the Centre Drill and Drill can be
found within the Tapping Unit section.

1-118
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the EndMill Cutter

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL < MENU > ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary
for the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menu
available.

[NOM- ∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


Input the nominal tool diameter for the operation. Milling tools must be selected
from the TOOL FILE and will therefore need to have been described prior to
selection.

[NOM- ∅] TOOL FILE CODE < MENU > ?


Input the suffix code letter that was allocated alongside the nominal diameter on
the TOOL FILE page to distinguish between end milling tools of the same
diameter.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY No. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order in the
program.

[HOLE - ∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


This value represents the hole diameter that is being machined with this tool. It
will be set automatically by the control according to the data that was set in the
first line of the unit. If the tool diameter is equal to the hole diameter, the control
will feed the tool down on the centre line of the hole at a % of the programmed,
(X/Y), feedrate as determined by data set in a specific parameter.
If the tool diameter is smaller than the hole diameter, the control will position the
tool down in Z (by feed or rapid, dependant on clearance), and will automatically
circular interpolate the hole.

[HOLE-DEP] HOLE DEPTH ?


The control will set the hole depth automatically according to the data that was set
in the first line of the unit. The hole depth is based on the finished depth of the
counterbore.

[PRE-DIA] PREPARED HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will set the prepared hole diameter automatically according to the
data that was set in the first line of the unit. The prepared hole diameter is based
on the drill diameter used.

1-119
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[RGH] BOTTOM FACE ROUGHNESS < MENU > ?
The control will set the bottom roughness automatically according to the data that
was set in the first line of the unit. If a surface roughness of 4 or greater is selected
and the tool diameter is smaller than the counterbore diameter, the control will
automatically process a finishing cut on the counterbore face.

[DEPTH] WIDTH OF CUT ?


This value will only be set once the diameter of the tool selected for this operation
has been entered. The control will automatically calculate the maximum
permissible radial width of cut to be taken by the tool using a parameter setting
that is normally set to a value of 60% of the tool diameter.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM DIA DEPTH


3 RGH CBOR 13. 5. 0. 4 9. 15.
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20 9. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 20 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 9. 15. 0 100 DRIL T4.5 25 0.127 8
3 E-MILL 10. A 13. 5. 9. ♦ 4 T6. 16 0.049 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR 0 0. 0. 90. ♦ 30. ♦ ♦ 6 ♦ ♦ ♦ 1

The data set for the Pattern Sequence for the above RGH CBOR unit is as
explained previously within the Tapping Unit.

1-120
640M PROGRAMMING COURSE CONTENTS

DAY 2

2. Cutting Conditions ........................................................ 2-1


Program Example No.3................................................. 2-9
Program Example No.4................................................. 2-15
Top End Mill Unit......................................................... 2-21
Reaming Unit ................................................................ 2-27
Search............................................................................ 2-35
Unit Copy...................................................................... 2-41
Line Machining ............................................................. 2-45
Shape Copy ................................................................... 2-69
Program Layout............................................................. 2-73
Machining Priorities...................................................... 2-77
Parameters..................................................................... 2-83
T.P.C. Information ........................................................ 2-115

C-2
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CUTTING CONDITIONS

2-1
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-2
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CUTTING CONDITIONS

To enter a material into the Cutting Condition library:


Press the F1 key, select C-COND. from the function key menu.

The screen will now change to display the C-SP matrix display for DRILL.
Press the menu WORK-MAT/TOOL-MAT to display the Work Material and
Tool Material registries.

2-3
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The Work Material and Tool Material screen will now be displayed. There are 16
material registers available and 8 Tool Material registers available. To enter a
material description, position the cursor into the window for either W. -MAT or
T. -MAT. The naming of the work or material must not exceed 8 characters.

To return to the Cutting Speed Display, press the menu C-SP.

2-4
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

This table represents a matrix containing relevant surface speed value for each
type of tool. By pressing the Page keys ↑↑ or ↓↓ , the different types of tool
can be selected.
To read the matrix for the DRILL displayed on the previous picture, select the
Work Material (for example STNLESS), select the Tool Material (for example
CARBIDE) and the surface speed will be 48 (m/min)

A similar display is available for FEEDRATE.


Press the menu key FR

To read the matrix for the DRILL displayed on the previous picture, select the
Work Material (for example STNLESS), select the Tool Material (for example
CARBIDE) and the cutting feedrate will be 0.182 (mm/rev).

2-5
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CUTTING CONDITION LEARN

Select the CUT COND LEARN from the function key.

During the machining with the Mazatrol program, when the machining conditions
are modified using VFC, the system will learn and store the modifications in this
display. When creating a new program for automatic setting of the cutting
conditions, if the data within the program matches the information stored within
the CUT COND LEARN library, the control will return these values in preference
to using the conventional cutting condition calculation method.

A maximum of 112 types of patterns can be registered. If more than 112 types of
patterns are entered, the excess will be erased with the oldest pattern first.

2-6
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
It is possible to edit or enter data into this library manually. By bringing the cursor
onto the registered entry, choose the menu DATA EDIT if you wish to modify an
existing entry.
By pressing the menu DATA ASSIGN, the cursor will automatically move to an
empty register which will enable you to enter new data.

1. DATA EDIT

2. DATA ASSIGN

2-7
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-8
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.3

2-9
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-10
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-11
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 3- PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALUMINUM 10. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 TOP EMIL 0. 4. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 40. A 5 -80. 42.5 XBI G00 3.4 28. 345 0.589 8
F 2 E-MILL 32. A 10 –49.5 72. YBI G00 * 22.4 345 0.448 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -57.5 52.5 57.5 -52.5

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


3 LINE OUT 5. 5. 20. 4 * 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 40. A 5 ? ? CW G00 4.4 * 364 0.736 8
F 2 E-MILL 32. A 10 ? ? CW G00 * * 384 0.448 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -40.
2 CCW ? ? 120. 0. -160. RGT R 10.
3 CCW ? ? 120. -160. 0. DOWN R 10.
4 CCW ? ? 120. 0. 160. LEFT R 10.
5 CCW ? ? 120. 160. 0. UP R 10.
6 CCW 0. -40. 120. 0. -160.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R RGH CHMF


4 CHMF OUT 0. 5. 25. * 1.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
1 CHF-C 20. A 50 ? ? CW G00 * * 628 0.2 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -40.
2 CCW ? ? 120. 0. -160. RGT R 10.
3 CCW ? ? 120. -160. 0. DOWN R 10.
4 CCW ? ? 120. 0. 160. LEFT R 10.
5 CCW ? ? 120. 160. 0. UP R 10.
6 CCW 0. -40. 120. 0. -160.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R RGH CHMF


5 CHMF OUT 5. 4. 7.78 * 1.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
1 CHF-C 20. A 50 ? ? CW G00 * * 628 0.2 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -57.5 52.5 57.5 -52.5

2-12
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
EXAMPLE 3- PROGRAM LISTING (CONTINUED)

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP


6 REAMING 10. 15. 0.3 E-MILL 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 15 10.6 * * * 90° * 60 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 20 9. 16. 5. 65 DRILT 2.7 75 0.15 8
3 E-MILL 9.9A 25 9.9 16. 9. 0 T 5.94 77 0.065 8
4 REAM 10. 45 10. 15. * * * G01 24 0.56 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 ARC 0. 0. 0. 90. -45. 25. * 0 7 * * 0 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL


7 BORE T1 30. 14. 1. 5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 15 15. * * * 90° * 50 0.14 8
2 DRILL 24. 30 30. 15. 0. 100 DRILT12. 75 0.286 8
3 BOR BAR 28.5 35 28.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.25 203 0.145 8
4 BOR BAR 29.5 40 29.5 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 227 0.104 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 50 999. 0. 30. 14. * C 1. 628 0.2 8
6 BOR BAR 30. 55 30. 15. CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.25 125 0.075 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


9 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * 0 NEAR

2-13
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-14
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.4

2-15
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-16
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-17
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 4- PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 STAINLS 15. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 TOP EMIL 0. 5. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 50. A -30. 12.5 XBI G00 4.4 35. 77 0.332 8
F 2 E-MILL 40. A 10 -25. YBI G00 * 28 77 0.448 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 100. 100.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


3 LINE OUT 4. 4. 5. 5 * 0.42 0.42
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 50. A ? ? CW G00 3.58 * 77 0.332 8
F 2 E-MILL 40. A ? ? CW G00 * 86 0.32 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 50. 5.
2 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. DOWN R 5.
3 CCW ? ? 30. 5. 5. UP R 5.
4 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. DOWN R 5.
5 CCW ? ? 30. 5. 95. UP R 5.
6 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. UP R 5.
7 CCW ? ? 30. 95. 95. DOWN R 5.
8 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. UP R 5.
9 CCW ? ? 30. 95. 5. DOWN R 5.
10 CW 50. 5. 45. 50. 50.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R RGH CHMF


8 CHMF OUT 0. 4. 30. * 1.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
1 CHF-C 20. A ? ? CW G00 * * 251 0.2 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 50. 5.
2 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. DOWN R 5.
3 CCW ? ? 30. 5. 5. UP R 5.
4 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. DOWN R 5.
5 CCW ? ? 30. 5. 95. UP R 5.
6 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. UP R 5.
7 CCW ? ? 30. 95. 95. DOWN R 5.
8 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. UP R 5.
9 CCW ? ? 30. 95. 5. DOWN R 5.
10 CW 50. 5. 45. 50. 50.

2-18
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 4- PROGRAM LISTING (CONTINUED)

UNo. UNIT DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R RGH CHMF


4 CHMF OUT 4. 5. 5. * 1.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
1 CHF-C 20. A ? ? CW G00 * * 251 0.2 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 100. 100.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM WAL DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL
5 BORE T2 50. 10. 1. 1 1 32. 16. 1. 5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 DRILL 30. 30. 17. 0. 100 DRILT13. 100 0.12 8
2 E-MILL 25. B 50. 10. 30. 1 T15. 73 0.132 8
3 BOR BAR 31.5 31.5 17. CYCLE2 10. 0 T 0.75 81 0.098 8
4 CHF-C 20. A 50. 10. 32. 6. * C 1. 251 0.2 8
5 CHF-C 20. A 100. 0. 50. 10. * C 1. 251 0.2 8
6 BOR BAR 32. 32. 17. CYCLE1 10. 0 T 0.25 89 0.171 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 50. 50. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


6 DRILLING 10. 13. 0.5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 11. * * * 90° * 14 0.14 8
2 DRILL 10. 10. 13. 4. 70 DRILT 5. 17 0.141 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR -4. 10. 10. 0. 90. 80. 80. 0 2 2 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-ø PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


7 TAPPING M10. 10. 1.5 17. 0.7 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 12. 10.101 * * * 90° * 14 0.14 8
2 DRILL 8.7 8.7 17. 3.6 65 DRILT 4.35 17 0.123 8
3 TAP M10. 10. 17. * * FIX P1.5 7 1.5 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR 0. 50. 50. 0. * 35. * * 4 * * * 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


10 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * 0 NEAR

2-19
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-20
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

TOP END MILL UNIT

2-21
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-22
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Selection of Top End Mill Unit

1. Press FACE MACHINING

2. Press TOP EMIL menu

2-23
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Top End Mill Unit. (TOP EMIL)
This unit is selected to machine a workpiece flatly on the machine by the use
of an end mill type tool.

TOP EMIL unit Tool sequence

Shape sequence entered Workpiece zero point

Finishing Roughing

DEPTH
...................
...................
...................
...................
SRV-Z ...................
FIN-Z End mill End mill
(for roughing) (for finishing)
M3P254 M3P255

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 TOP EMIL 0 4. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦

The explanation for the Main Unit data for Top End Mill is identical to that for the
Face Mill Unit.

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 TOPEMIL 0 4. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦
Sno. TOOL NOM-∅ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 40.A ? ? XBI G01 3.4 28 345 0.589 8
F2 E-MILL 32.A ? ? YBI G01 ♦ 22.4 345 0.448 8

TOOL SEQUENCE DATA FOR END MILLS


WHEN USING TOP END MILL UNIT

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

2-24
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?
Input the nominal tool diameter for the operation. Milling tools must be selected
from the TOOL FILE library and will therefore need to have been entered into the
TOOL FILE prior to selection within the program.

[NOM-∅] TOOL FILE CODE ?


Input the tool suffix code allocated alongside the nominal diameter on the TOOL
FILE page to distinguish between tools of the same diameter but of different
configuration.

[NO.] MACHINING PRIORITY No. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[APRCH-X] APPROACH POINT X, AUTO → <MENU> ?


[APRCH-Y] APPROACH POINT Y, AUTO → <MENU> ?
The approach point is the initial X and Y absolute co-ordinate position from where
the centre of the tool starts its cutting feed. (This point is automatically determined
by the control by selecting the AUTO SET menu available.)

[TYPE] CUTTING DIRECTION <MENU> ?


Select the desired tool path direction from the menu available. (The diagrams below
illustrate the X-axis directions. The same principles can be applied to the Y-axis
cutting directions.)

X BI-DIR X UNI-DIR

[ZFD] FEEDRATE Z, <MENU> / DATA <INPUT> ?


This menu is not applicable to the FACE MILL Unit (where the tool will always
Rapid to depth.)
This sets the Z axis feed rate of a tool from a position just clear of the material
surface to the Z level at which the XY plane machining occurs.

2-25
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Select either from the menu available: G00 = Rapid Traverse, G01 = Axial Feedrate.
(A Parameter sets this at a % of the XY feed rate), or, enter a data value (range 0.1 to
9.9), - this being a multiple of the XY feed rate.

[DEP-Z] DEPTH OF CUT ?


This value determines the Roughing depth of cut per pass in the Z-axis. The value is
automatically set by selecting the AUTO SET menu available. It is not possible to
exceed this value as the maximum Roughing depth of cut per pass is determined by
the value that has been registered against this tool within the TOOL FILE library.
(This is not applicable to finishing tool sequence data).

[WID-R] WIDTH OF CUT ?


This value determines the width of cut per pass in the X/Y axis. If the AUTO SET
menu has been selected, the control will return a value that represents 70% of the
nominal cutter diameter (set by parameter). It is not possible to set a value greater
than the tool diameter.

* The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

For the explanation of the Figure data (Square definition), see the Face Milling unit
of component No. 1.

UN0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 TOPEMIL 0 4. 4 ♦ 0.6 ♦
Sno. TOOL NOM-∅ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 40.A ? ? XBI G01 3.4 28 345 0.589 8
F2 E-MILL 32.A ? ? YBI G01 ♦ 22.4 345 0.448 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3/Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -57.5 52.5 57.5 -52.5

Press the SHAPE END menu to complete the Unit.

PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>?


SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE
END

2-26
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

REAMING UNIT

2-27
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-28
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Selection of Reaming Unit.

1. Press POINT MACHINING.

2. Press REAMING menu.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP


6 REAMING 10. 15. 0.3 E-MILL 0

DIA

DEPTH
CHMF

2-29
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[DIA] HOLE DIAMETER ?


This represents the finished diameter of the reamed hole.

[DEPTH] HOLE DEPTH ?


This represents the amount of FULL REAMING DEPTH that is required.

[CHMF] CHAMFER WIDTH ?


This represents the amount of chamfer required at the top of the reamed hole.

[PRE-REAM] PRE-REAMING OPERATION < MENU > ?


Select the required pre-reaming operation from the menu available. There are 3
choices: - ① DRILL, ② BORING BAR, ③ ENDMILL.
The tool development provided would be dependant on the pre-reaming cycle
chosen.
For DRILL process: Centre Drill, Drill and Reamer.
For BORING BAR process: Centre Drill, Drill, Boring Bar and Reamer.
For END MILL process: Centre Drill, Drill, End Mills and Reamer.

[CHP] CHIP VAC. CLEANER < Y:1, N:0 > ?


This enables the use of a special vacuum tool for swarf removal before the
reaming of the hole. Enter 1 if this tool is required or enter 0 if this tool is not
required.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP


6 REAMING 10. 15. 0.3 E-MILL 0
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20 9. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 60 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 9. 16. 5 65 DRIL T2.7 75 0.15 8
3 E-MILL 9.9 A 9.9 16. 9. ♦ 0 T5.94 77 0.065 8
4 REAM 10. 10. 15. ♦ ♦ ♦ G01 24 0.56 8

The explanation of the Tool Sequence data for the Centre Drill, Drill and E-Mill
can be found within the Rough C’Bore Unit section.

2-30
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Tool Sequence Data for the Reamer

[TOOL] WHICH TYPE OF TOOL <MENU> ?


The control will automatically select the most appropriate type of tool necessary for
the unit programmed. However, different tools can be selected from the menus
available.

[NOM-∅] NOMINAL DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically select the size of the reamer to be used. If a different
size of reamer is required, set the diameter manually by using the data entry keys
and then press the [INPUT] key.

[NOM-∅] TOOL ID CODE < MENU > ?


Optionally, input the suffix code letter to distinguish between different
configuration reamers of the same diameter. These tools are not registered in a
TOOL FILE library within the memory of the control, unlike that of milling tools.

[No.] MACHINING PRIORITY NO. ?


Enter a numeric value (1 to 99) that represents the tools machining order within the
program.

[HOLE-∅] HOLE DIAMETER ?


The control will automatically set the hole diameter that is being machined with this
tool. If the nominal diameter of the reamer is changed, then enter the hole diameter
to be the same.

[HOLE DEP] HOLE DEPTH ?


This value represents the full depth to the end of the reamer.

[DEPTH] RETURN SPEED <MENU>/ MIN<INP> ?


This represents the rate at which the reamer is retracted out of the hole.
Select either from the menu available: G00 = Rapid Traverse, G01 = Axial
Feedrate. (A Parameter sets the feedrate as non-synchronous feed if set, or, the
feedrate will be the same as the cutting feedrate if not set).
Alternatively, a data value can be entered (range 1-9999), - this being a direct
feedrate value in mm/min or in/min.

*The data set for the [C-SP], [FR] and M code information are as explained
previously within the Face Mill Unit.

2-31
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Point Cutting Pattern Data

For setting the Point Cutting Pattern data, select ARC from the menu displayed
below.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP


6 REAMING 10. 15. 0.3 E-MILL 0
SNo TOOL NOM-∅ No. HOLE-∅ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR-DR 20 9. ♦ ♦ ♦ 90° ♦ 60 0.14 8
2 DRILL 9. 9. 16. 5 65 DRIL T2.7 75 0.15 8
3 E-MILL 9.9 A 9.9 16. 9. ♦ 0 T5.94 77 0.065 8
4 REAM 10. 10. 15. ♦ ♦ ♦ G01 24 0.56 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 ARC 0. 0. 0. 90. -45. 25 ♦ 0 7 ♦ ♦ 0 1

[Z] Z VALUE OF WORK SURFACE ?


This represents the distance from the workpiece Z zero point to the machining
surface.

[X] CIRCLE CENTRE X ?


This represents the absolute X co-ordinate of the centre of the pitch circle to be
drilled.

[Y] CIRCLE CENTRE Y ?


This represents the absolute Y co-ordinate of the centre of the pitch circle to be
drilled.

2-32
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[AN1] ANGLE OF START POINT FROM X AXIS ?
This represents the position where the 1st hole is to be machined. Angles are
measured from the +X axis (3 o’clock position represents 0 degrees), CCW =
Positive value, CW = Negative value.

Specify the angle θ1 formed by the start point and the X axis.

First hole to be machined There are two types of θ1

CCW direction: θ1 = 30°


3 0
θ1 (CCW) (to the left) (+) ...................................
AN1
CW direction: θ’1 = –330°
θ’1 (CW) (to the right) (–) .................................
3 3 0

M3P165

[AN2] PITCH ANGLE OR TOTAL ARC ?


This represents either the pitch angular distance between each hole or, the total
angular distance between the 1st hole and the last hole.

Specify the angle of pitch between two adjacent holes or the angle between the first hole and the last hole.

First hole to be machined


θ’: Angle of pitch between two adjadent holes

θ2 4 5
θ’2 θ2 = 45o ................................

AN2
X axis θ’2: Total angle between the first hole and the last hole

θ’2 = 135o .............................


1 3 5
M3P166

(Designate θ2 or θ’2)

[T1] CIRCLE RADIUS R ?


This value represents the radius of the pitch circle.

[F] AN2→ <PITCH: 0, TOTAL ARC: 1> ?


This value determines whether the control processes the value that was entered in
column AN2 as the PITCH between each hole or as the total ARC distance between
the 1st hole and the last hole. Enter a 0 if AN2 = Pitch, Enter a 1 if AN2 – Total Arc.

2-33
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[M] NUMBER OF HOLES ?


Specify the total number of holes to be machined

[Q] OMIT SPT MACHINING <Y: 1, N: 0> ?


This value determines if machining at the start position (1st hole) is to be executed
or not. Enter a 1 to move to the start position but omit the machining, Enter a 0 to
move to the start position and execute the machining.

Specify the machining at the starting point is executed or not:

Start point

Actual execution of the machining .................


0
Q
Start point

M3P167
Only positioning without machining ................
1

[R] RETURN POSITION <INIT: 0, R: 1> ?


For the explanation for the Return Position, see the pattern sequence data within the
TAPPING unit .

2-34
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SEARCH

2-35
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-36
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The SEARCH function can be used to search for data within a program as an
alternative to using the cursor or page keys.

To enable the search function you must select PROGRAM from the main option
menu.

Now select SEARCH.

You may now select the criteria to search for, from the Menu Options listed.

UNIT No. SEARCH: You may search for a particular Unit, by Unit No. if the
Identifying Number is known then enter it in to the control and press the Input
key. This will position the cursor on the header line of the specified unit.

LAST SEARCH: This function enables you to search for the last entry made in
the program, select this option and press the INPUT key. The cursor will
reposition itself at the start of the last line in the program.

2-37
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNIT SEARCH: You may search for a Unit type by name. Once you have
chosen this option the menu lists the different unit types for selection. Make your
selection, for example POINT MACHINING.

The menu then offers the different Point Machining cycles available, see below.

Select the cycle type from the Menu options. In this example as we have chosen
A Boring type cycle we are asked to choose from the different types of Boring
cycle available.

Having made your selection from the Menu, then press the INPUT key, the
control will search DOWN the program to find the first unit of this type. The
cursor will position itself at the start of the unit. If the INPUT key is pressed again
the control will search down for the NEXT occurrence of this type of unit.

NOTE: The control will not search UP the program, so the cursor must be initially
positioned ABOVE the unit to be searched for.

An alarm will be generated by the control when the type of unit required for the
search does not appear below the cursor position in the program, or that type of
process does not exist in the current program.

2-38
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The control only searches within the current program, and so will not find unit
names existing in Sub-programs called from the main program.

TOOL SEARCH: Searches for a tool name used within the program. To use this
function select the appropriate option from the SEARCH option menu.

If the tool name you require does not appear on this display then press the >>>
key to reveal additional options.

Select the type of tool to search for, then enter the nominal size of the cutter as
described in the program. By then pressing the INPUT key the control will search
down the program for described tool type positioning the cursor at the start of the
Tool sequence line. Pressing the input key for a second time will result in the
control looking for the next time the tool description is used.

NOTE: The same rules apply to Tool Search as with Unit search

2-39
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-40
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNIT COPY

2-41
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-42
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The UNIT COPY function is used to reproduce an existing unit. The unit may
exist within the current program or in ANY Mazatrol program in the memory
of the control.

To copy the required unit you must enter into PROGRAM EDIT mode and
position the cursor where you want the copied unit to be inserted. Press the F12
key from the Menu Drive. The display will change as seen below.

Select from the menu options UNIT COPY.

Select the Work No. in which the unit to be copied is contained and press INPUT.
Enter the Unit No. from the original program and press INPUT. The unit will be
duplicated into the current program .

NOTES: The COMMON UNIT (UNIT No.0) cannot be copied.


Cutting conditions will not be adjusted when a unit is copied into a
program.

2-43
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-44
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

LINE MACHINING

2-45
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-46
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Line Machining Units

Line machining units are used to enter a profile machining method, and the data
relating to a form to be machined. The unit includes two sequences: One is the
tool sequence, subject to which data are entered in relation to the operational
details of tool, and the other the shape sequence. E.g. The profile information
entered in relation to the machining dimensions specified on drawing.

Types of line machining units:

1: LINE CENTRE ( LINE CTR )

Using Line Centre, the centre of the cutting tool will follow the programmed
profile.

2: LINE RIGHT ( LINE RGT )

Using Line Right, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the right hand side of
the programmed profile so that the periphery of the tool is kept in contact with
the programmed shape.

2-47
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3: LINE LEFT ( LINE LFT )

Using Line Left, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the left hand side of
the programmed profile so that the periphery of the tool is kept in contact with
the programmed shape.

4: LINE OUT ( LINE OUT )

Using Line Out, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the outside of the
programmed profile so that the periphery of the tool is kept in contact with the
programmed shape. With line out, the shape described must be fully enclosed.
If the shape described is not enclosed, the control will attempt to join the end
point of the shape, to the start point.

2-48
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

5: LINE IN ( LINE IN )

Using Line In, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the outside of the
programmed profile so that the periphery of the tool is kept in contact with the
programmed shape. With line in, the shape described must be fully enclosed. If
the shape described is not enclosed, the control will attempt to join the end point
of the shape, to the start point.

6: CHAMFER RIGHT ( CHMF RGT )

Using Chamfer Right, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the right hand
side of the programmed profile so that the angle edge of the tool is kept in
contact with the programmed shape.

7: CHAMFER LEFT ( CHMF LFT )

Using Chamfer Left, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the left hand side of
the programmed profile so that the angle edge of the tool is kept in contact with
the programmed shape.

2-49
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

8: CHAMFER OUT ( CHMF OUT )

Using Chamfer Out, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the outside of the
programmed profile so that the angle edge of the tool is kept in contact with the
programmed shape. With chamfer out, the shape described must be fully
enclosed. If the shape described is not enclosed, the control will attempt to join
the end point of the shape, to the start point.

9: CHAMFER IN ( CHMF IN )

Using Chamfer In, the centre of the cutting tool is offset to the outside of the
programmed profile so that the angle edge of the tool is kept in contact with the
programmed shape. With chamfer in, the shape described must be fully
enclosed. If the shape described is not enclosed, the control will attempt to join
the end point of the shape, to the start point.

Note:
When using Line, Centre / Right / Left, or, Chamfer, Right / Left, the
direction of the tool path will be determined by the programmed direction of the
figure data lines.
When using Line, In / Out, or, Chamfer, In / Out, the tool path direction is
NOT determined by the programmed direction of the figure data lines. Instead
the tool path direction is determined independently within the Tool Sequence
data.

2-50
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Outside linear machining unit (LINE OUT)


This unit should be selected to carry out the machining of an outside
closed form.
Data setting
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R
3 LINE OUT 5. 5. 20. 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL
F2 E-MILL

Remark 1: Data in unit represents information for Program Example 3


Remark 2: : Data cannot be set here.
Remark 3: In this unit, end mills are automatically developed.
Nevertheless, they may be switched over to face mill or ball
end mill.
Remark 4: In the tool sequence, a maximum of up to two tools are
automatically developed though dependent upon the data
SRV-Z, SRV-R, FIN-Z and FIN-R.
Q’ty Machining Pattern
1 R1 (Roughing) FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0
1 F1 (Finishing) SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SRV-R ≤ FIN-R
2 R1, F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Other than those specified above

LINE OUT unit Tool sequence

Workpiece zero point

Shape sequence entered

DEPTH Roughing

SRV-Z
........
........
........
........
........
........
......

FIN-Z End mill End mill


Finishing (for roughing) (for finishing)

FIN-R

SRV-R
M3P185 M3P173

2-51
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

RGH:A roughness code should be selected from the menus.


FIN-Z: A Z-axis finishing allowance is automatically established
once a roughness code has been selected.
FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is also automatically established
once a roughness code has been selected.

Procedure for selecting line machining unit


Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu
keys) to display the following menu.

Pressing the menu key LINE MACH-ING displays the following


line machining unit menus.

Press the LINE OUT. (For program example No 3)


Enter data in answer to the questions asked by the control.

[DEPTH] DIST: WPC Z0 TO FIN. SURFACE?


This is the distance from the work piece Z zero to the finished
machined surface. (This must be a positive value).

2-52
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[SRV-Z] Z AXIS STOCK REMOVAL?
This is the amount of material in Z to be removed above the finished
machined surface. (This must be a positive value).

[SRV-R] X/Y AXIS STOCK REMOVAL?


This is the approximated amount of radial stock to be removed, and
cannot be greater than the diameter of the endmill/facemill selected
to remove this stock.

[RGH] SURFACE ROUGHNESS <MENU>?


Choose the required surface finish on the sidewall being machined
from the menu available.
Codes 1 to 3 will only develop roughing type operations with no
finishing allowance. Codes 4 to 9 will develop both roughing and
finishing operations.
Code 1 is the roughest finish -equivalent to 1000 microinch Ra (25.4
micrometer Ra). The surface roughness value reducing by 50% as
the code number increases by 1, successively.

[FIN-Z] FINISH ALLOWANCE Z?


This is the amount of material left on in Z for the finishing operation.
(This value will be automatically calculated if surface roughness
codes 4 to 9 are programmed. However if surface roughness codes 1
to 3 are programmed the value will be determined as zero).

[FIN-R] FINISH ALLOWANCE R?


This menu is not applicable to the Line Ctr unit.
This is the amount of material left on radially for the finishing
operation. (This value will be automatically calculated if surface
roughness codes 4 to 9 are programmed. However if surface
roughness codes 1 to 3 are programmed the value will be determined
as zero).

2-53
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Line machining tool sequence data

For line machining tool sequence data, only a tool name is automatically
selected once a machining unit has been entered. Other data should be
entered by use of menu keys, or numeric keys according to a form of the
workpiece to be machined or to the procedure for machining .

SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M

R1 E-MILL
F2 E-MILL

1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 10

: Data cannot be entered here.

Tool designation: TOOL


The name of a tool can be changed by the use of menu keys.

In the LINE centre, right/left, or, out/in machining units, either end mill,
face mill or ball end mill is selectable. In the CHAMFER right/left, or,
out/in units, only a chamfering cutter is selectable.
Nominal diameter of tool: NOM-φ
Enter the approximate diameter of the tool. This make’s a distinction
between tools having the same discription. (e.g. ENDMILL 10.-
ENDMILL 20.)
Tool identification code
A code can be selected from the menus to identify those tools which are
of identical type (having an identical name), and have an identical
nominal diameter.(e.g. ENDMILL 20.- ENDMILL 20.A)

2-54
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

To change a heavy tool in the ATC mode, select a heavy tool


identification code.
With the menu key HEAVY TOOL pressed, the display will change over
to the menu for heavy tool identification code’s.
Heavy tool selection, will slow down the machines ATC (Auto tool
changer), where applicable.
Priority number: No.
Enter the priority number for prior machining and subsequent machining.
There are three following entry methods.
Prior machining priority number
To be set by means of numeric keys. The number is displayed in yellow.
Setting range (1 to 99).
Subsequent machining priority number
To be set by means of numeric keys after having reversed the display of
DELAY PRIORITY by selecting its menu key.
The characters are displayed in reversed status.
Setting range (1 to 99).
Without entry (ordinary machining)
The priority number is not entered.
Coordinates X and Y of the approach point: APRCH-X, APRCH-Y
Enter an X, Y coordinates of the position at which a tool is to start cutting
from.
With the menu key AUTO SET selected, ? is displayed. After the tool
path check is performed, ? will automatically change over to the
coordinates of a cutting start point. (Refer to tool path by each unit.)

2-55
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Machining method: TYPE

Use menu keys to select the direction in which machining is to be


performed. This only applies to, LINE OUT/IN, and CHAMFER
OUT/IN units.

CW CCW

When the menu key CW CUT is pressed, When the menu key CCW CUT is pressed,
machining is performed clockwise. machining is performed counterclockwise.

M3P234

Z-axis feedrate: ZFD


Enter the feedrate in Z-axis direction. It is possible to select rapid feed
(G00), or cutting feed (G01), by the use of menu’s keys.

2-56
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

ZFD Feedrate
G00 Rapid feed
Initial point
G01 Parameter E17 may
be used to determine:
Determine this rate.
E17
Feed ×
10

Numeric value Feed × α


Workpiece (α)

M3P235

Cutting depth-Z: DEP-Z


In roughing, a maximum cutting depth in one pass is entered. With
the menu key “AUTO SET” selected, a smaller value is entered,
either the data SRV-Z entered in the machining unit or the maximum
cutting depth, for the tool, registered on the TOOL FILE display. An
actual axial cutting depth is arithmetically obtained from the data
DEP-Z, SRV-Z and FIN-Z, both in the machining unit. (For
calculation formula, see the section “FACE MACHINING”

Cutting conditions (circumferential speed, feed): C-SP, FR


A spindle speed and a cutting feedrate are entered.
With the menu key “AUTO SET” selected, optimum cutting
conditions are calculated and entered, based on the materials of both
the workpiece, tool, and on the cutting depth. (A circumferential
speed is given in meters per minute and a cutting feedrate in
millimeters per revolution.)
M codes: M
Set the required M code(s) to be output immediately after mounting
the tool onto the spindle in the ATC mode. A maximum of up to two
M codes may be entered. It is also possible, to select and enter a
general M code from the menu’s.

2-57
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

FIGURE DATA.

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE<MENU> ?


Select from the menu’s, the appropriate figure pattern. The profile
shape is defined as an ARBITRY figure pattern.

Once the ARBITRY menu has been chosen, a new set of menus will

appear that are specific to ARBITRY figure patterns (see below).

Under the ARBITRY figure pattern, there are several different

menus that allow repeating shapes to be constructed more easily.


However, to begin with, we are only going to concentrate on five of
the menu’s displayed:
LINE, CW ARC, CCW ARC, SHAPE END and CHECK.

For the purpose of this example, the figure line data will be
programmed in a clockwise direction around the shape. However, it
could also be programmed in a counter clockwise direction.
As a general rule, to reduce the amount of data to be entered, we can
treat any arcs, where only the radius value of the arc is known, as
corner (CNR) rads, at the intersection points of the main figure
patterns. In this example, treat the 120.mm arcs as main figure
geometry, and, the 10.mm arcs as corner rads.

2-58
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Diagram showing a clockwise direction of


programming for the Figure LINE data.

FIGURE LINE 1

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE<MENU>?


Before we can actually start entering data for the shape, we must
look at the component drawing and identify a known coordinate to
be used as our first point. Once a coordinate point has been
identified, we can begin.

The first point is entered, (for an ARBITRY shape), by selecting the


LINE menu.

NOTE: The first figure, within an ARBITRY shape, will be


displayed in blue, compared to the normal colour of green. The
significance of the blue colour is to display the start of the shape.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE?


Enter in the X axis value for the first point coordinate. Relating to the
component profile being programmed, the value for X will be 0
(zero).

[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE?


Enter in the Y axis value for the first point coordinate. Relating to the
component profile being programmed, the value for Y will be -40.

2-59
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
NOTE: The first point entered should only contain X and Y coordinate data, no
other information is required. To start a new figure line, press the
cursor down key.

FIGURE LINE 2

Start Position
LINE X0. Y-40.

The geometry of the shape is now constructed in individual spans


being described as, LINE, CW ARC or CCW ARC.

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE<MENU>?


After entering the first point, we can now see that the first actual
geometry is a counter-clockwise direction arc span. Therefore, press
the CCW ARC menu.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE?


[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE?
We are now required to enter in the X and Y coordinate points for
the end point of the CCW ARC. This will be the point were the arc
is intersected by the next piece of main geometry. However, the end
point of the arc isn’t specified on the drawing, so choose the ?
(Question mark) from the menu.

2-60
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

>5 @ RADIUS R?
The value we enter in here represents the radius for the arc currently
being defined. The component drawing for the example details the
radius, in all quadrants, to be 120.mm.

Note: If the angular span of the radius is less than or equal to 180m and no
centre point is given, then the value for the radius is entered as
positive. However, if the angular span of the radius is equal to or
greater than 180m and no centre point is given, then the value for the
radius is entered as negative.

[I] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-X?


[J] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-Y?
With the end point of arc not specified, it now becomes necessary to
provide some additional information regarding the centre point about
which the arc is interpolated.

The arc centre for X is 0 (zero).


The arc centre for Y is -160.

Note: It is not necessary to use arc centre positions when the start point,
final point and radial value of the arc are all known.

[P] INTERSECTION POINT <MENU>?


If an arc is being intersected with either a line or another arc, there will always be
two points of intersection. (Similarly, if a line is tangent to an arc, there will be
two possible points of tangency). If this situation occurs and X &/or Y end point
of the current figure line has not been entered, then this prompt must be answered.
We must therefore picture the current arc being defined and the next arc
intersecting with it. The menu displayed allows us to pinpoint the required
intersection point using either UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT.

2-61
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
From the diagram shown below, we can see that the required
intersection point can be correctly identified by either using UP or
RIGHT.

U/R

D/L

[CNR] CORNER R OR CORNER C <MENU>?


Using the ‘Corner R or Corner C facility’ it is possible to blend two
adjoining figure lines with either a Radius or a Chamfer.

The component drawing details a 10.mm blend radius in each corner.

If a value is entered in alone, it will be determined as a radius, but if


the menu CORNER CHAMFER is selected first, it will be
determined as a chamfer. The two diagrams below show firstly, the
profile without a blend radius and then the profile with a blend
radius.

Corner shown without Corner shown with


Blend radius or chamfer blend radius

2-62
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

FIGURE LINE 3

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


The next actual geometry is an another counterclockwise direction
arc span. Therefore press the CCW ARC menu.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE ?


[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE ?
We are now required to enter in the X and Y coordinate points for
the end point of the CCW ARC. This will be the point were the arc
is intersected by the next piece of main geometry. However, the end
point of the arc isn’t specified on the drawing so choose the ?
(Question mark) from the menu.

>5 @ RADIUS R ?
The value we enter in here represents the radius for the arc currently
being defined. The component drawing for the example details the
radius, in all quadrants, to be 120.mm.

[I] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-X ?


[J] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-Y ?
With the end point of arc not specified, it now becomes necessary to
provide some additional information regarding the centre point
about which the arc is interpolated.

The arc centre for X is -160.


The arc centre for Y is 0 (zero).

[P] INTERSECTION POINT <MENU> ?


We must now picture the current arc being defined and the next arc
intersecting with it. From the diagram shown below, we can see that
the required intersection point can be correctly identified by either
using DOWN or RIGHT.

2-63
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

U/L

D/R

[CNR] CORNER R OR CORNER C <MENU> ?


The component drawing details a 10.mm blend radius in each corner.

FIGURE LINE 4

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


The next actual geometry is again another counterclockwise direction
arc span. Therefore press the CCW ARC menu.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE ?


[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE ?
We are now required to enter in the X and Y coordinate points for
the end point of the CCW ARC. This will be the point were the arc
is intersected by the next piece of main geometry. However, the end
point of the arc isn’t specified on the drawing so choose the ?
(Question mark) from the menu.

>5 @ RADIUS R ?
The value we enter in here represents the radius for the arc currently
being defined. The component drawing for the example details the
radius, in all quadrants, to be 120.mm.

2-64
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[I] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-X ?


[J] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-Y ?
With the end point of arc not specified, it now becomes necessary to
provide some additional information regarding the centre point about
which the arc is interpolated.

The arc centre for X is 0 (zero)


The arc centre for Y is 160.

[P] INTERSECTION POINT <MENU> ?

We must now picture the current arc being defined and the next arc
intersecting with it. From the diagram shown below, we can see that
the required intersection point can be correctly identified by either
using DOWN or LEFT.

U/R

D/L

[CNR] CORNER
R OR CORNER C <MENU> ?
The component drawing details a 10.mm blend radius in each corner.

2-65
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

FIGURE LINE 5

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


The next actual geometry is again another counterclockwise direction
arc span. Therefore press the CCW ARC menu.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE ?


[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE ?
We are now required to enter in the X and Y coordinate points for
the end point of the CCW ARC. This will be the point were the arc
is intersected by the next piece of main geometry. However, the end
point of the arc isn’t specified on the drawing so choose the ?
(Question mark) from the menu.

>5 @ RADIUS R ?
The value we enter in here represents the radius for the arc being
currently defined. The component drawing for the example details
the radius, in all quadrants, to be 120.mm.

[I] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-X ?


[J] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-Y ?
With the end point of arc not specified, it now becomes necessary to
provide some additional information regarding the centre point about
which the arc is interpolated.

The arc centre for X is 160.


The arc centre for Y is 0 (zero).

[P] INTERSECTION POINT <MENU> ?


We must now picture the current arc being defined and the next arc
intersecting with it. From the diagram shown below, we can see that
the required intersection point can be correctly identified by either
using UP or LEFT.

2-66
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

U/L

D/R

[CNR] CORNER R OR CORNER C <MENU> ?


The component drawing details a 10.mm blend radius in each corner.

FIGURE LINE 6

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


The next, and last, actual geometry span is again another
counterclockwise direction arc span. Therefore press the CCW ARC
menu.

[X] COORDINATE X OF FIGURE ?


[Y] COORDINATE Y OF FIGURE ?
It is important that we finish the geometry with a known coordinate
end point, as question marks should not be used on the final figure
line. The end of the arc is detailed on the drawing. It is actually the
same point from where the geometry started at the beginning of the
shape.

The final point in X = 0. (Zero)


The final point in Y = -40.

>5 @ RADIUS R ?
The value we enter in here represents the radius for the arc currently
being defined. The component drawing for the example details the
radius, in all quadrants, to be 120.mm.

2-67
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[I] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-X ?


[J] ARC CENTER COORDINATE-Y ?
Although the end point of arc is now specified, it still becomes
necessary to provide the centre point coordinates about which the arc
is interpolated. This is because the previous figure line contains
unknown final coordinates in X and Y (?).

The arc centre for X is 0 (zero).


The arc centre for Y is -160.

[P] INTERSECTION POINT <MENU> ?


There is no requirement to enter an intersection position for a point
that is already known. Use the cursor key to skip over to the next
question.

[CNR] CORNER R OR CORNER C <MENU> ?


There is no corner radius or chamfer at the end point of this arbitry
shape. Use the cursor key to position the cursor down onto a new
figure line.

USING THE SHAPE CHECK DISPLAY WITHIN AN ARBITRY


FIGURE PATTERN.
CHECK can only be performed after a figure line has been
completed containing known X and Y coordinates.

SHAPE END
To end a machining unit containing an ARBITRY figure pattern, the
cursor must first of all be positioned at the start of a new figure line,
SHAPE END must then be pressed twice.

2-68
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SHAPE COPY

2-69
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-70
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The SHAPE COPY function allows you to copy existing Figure pattern data from
one unit to a new unit.

To use the SHAPE COPY command the initial information must first be set in the
required unit ie. Unit informantion and Tool sequence data. Once this has been
done then the copying of the Shape information can be performed. See below:

Once this information has been set, PRIOR to any Figure data being
entered for the unit select the F12 menu key.

Select the SHAPE COPY from the menu bar.

Now enter in the Unit No. from which the figure data is to be copied and press
Input. (The unit must be contained within the current program). Figure Data can
only be copied from a similar type of unit for example Chamfer Out to Line Out
NOT from a Line Machining type unit to Point or Face Machining Units for
example.

2-71
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-72
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM LAYOUT

2-73
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-74
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM LAYOUT
Once the cursor has been positioned to the required process on the Process
Control page, the menu PROGRAM LAYOUT can then be selected.
Alternatively, the PROGRAM LAYOUT menu can be selected from the
displayed menus as shown previously within the Process Control section.
(The actual process data subsequently displayed will be dependent on the position
of the cursor within the program).
After a few seconds, displayed on the Program Layout screen will be the actual
machining sequence to be used by the control, taking into account the machining
priorities.
This Program layout screen is not only a ‘simplification’ of the program screen,
listing the machining sequences in the order in which machining will occur, but
also edits to the priority numbers can be made on this screen.

Display Screen of Program Layout

For the rules relating to the usage of ‘Normal’ Priorities, Delay Priorities, Priority
No. Assign and Priority No. All Erase, see the section on Machining Priorities

2-75
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Priority No. Move


The menu PRI. No. MOVE can be selected to update a priority number
sequence. That is, if the priority number being set against a tool is already
allocated to another tool, then the previously allocated tool priority number, (and
possibly subsequently affected tool priority numbers), will be automatically
incremented to maintain the correct tool machining sequence.

Store
To retain priority numbers that have been entered on the Program Layout screen,
for example when wishing to view another screen, the STORE menu must be
selected or else they will be lost on returning to the Program Layout screen.

Program Write
To edit the priority numbers which have been entered on the Program layout
screen into the program, select the menu PROGRAM WRITE, and then press
the Input key.

The Process Control and Program Layout screens can also be accessed to display
the data for programs where no machining priorities have been allocated.

2-76
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MACHINING PRIORITIES

2-77
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-78
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MACHINING PRIORITY No.

If Machining Priority numbers are not allocated to the tools listed within a
Mazatrol program, then the machining sequence will be the same as the order in
which the tools are defined in the program.
This also means that the Machining Units are processed in the order in which they
are defined within the program, - without regard to the possible use of the same
tool in different units. This machining sequence can be referred to as Program
Priority.

To alter the machining sequence, and to overcome the possible problem of


unnecessary additional tool changes of the same tool defined in different units of a
program, Machining Priorities can be utilised.

Priority Number Allocation


A Machining Priority number can be allocated to any tool or within an M code
unit. With the cursor set in the Machining Priority No. Column of any tool
sequence block, the following menu options are displayed:

Priority Numbers can be allocated without using these menu options. The
permissible number range being from No’s 1 to 99, and the numbers allocated do
not have to be consecutive. This type of priority is referred to as a ‘Normal’
priority and is displayed in Yellow on the program screen.

Delay Priority
Tools to be used for ‘Finishing’ operations can be allocated with a DELAY
priority by selecting the DELAY PRIORITY menu before entering a priority
number (range: - 1 to 99).
These delay priorities are displayed in White on a purple background.

2-79
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Processing Sequence
Even though some tools may be allocated priority numbers, it is not essential to
allocate numbers to all tools.
The strict order of processing the sequence of machining for a Mazatrol program
with priority numbers is as follows: -

1) Machining is performed with tools allocated the ‘Normal’ priorities starting


with the lowest priority number through to the highest number found.

2) Machining is performed with the tools, which have No priority numbers


allocated starting with the first Non priority tool listed in the program through
to the last non priority tool.

3) Finally, machining is performed with the tools allocated the Delay priorities
starting with the lowest priority number through to the highest number found.
Note: -
If a priority number is not allocated to an M code unit, then this M code unit will
be processed every time that the control scans the program to action the next
machining operation.

Priority Number Assign


If a tool is defined more than once in a program and it is required to allocate the
same priority number to this common tool, then, PRIORITY NO. ASSIGN, can
be selected from the menu option before entering the priority number to be
assigned.

2-80
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Priority Number Change
The menu, PRIORITY No. CHANGE, can be selected to change a priority
number, (assigned in a program to a tool defined more than once), from its current
number to a new number.

Sub Program = Process End


If the menu, SUB PROG PROC END is selected as well as PRIORITY No.
ASSIGN, and then a priority number is entered, the control will assign the entered
number for all the occurrences of the current tool, up to, but not beyond a Sub
Program Unit.

Process End Unit


A program, (or several programs linked together), can be split into sections, where
the first section machining operations will be completed before the second section
commences, and the second section machining operations will be completed
before the third section commences etc.
To achieve this, a PROCESS END unit must be entered into the program (where
the end of a section (Process) is required.
With the cursor set at the beginning of a new (undefined) unit, press the
OTHER menu select key to display some additional menu functions - one menu
being the PROCESS END unit.

2-81
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Selection of Process End

Pressing PROCESS END, automatically enters the Process End unit into the
program.
The menu, PALLET CHANGE, also accessed through the OTHER menu
option has the same effect as the Process End unit, (as well as actioning a pallet
change).

When a program is divided into two or more processes, this enables the re-use of
priority numbers that may have been allocated in previous processes. (Normally,
attempting to enter the same priority number against different tools results in an
alarm).

Priority Number Erase


If it is required to remove priorities from the program, they can be removed
individually by positioning the cursor on the priority number to be removed and
then pressing the Cancel key.
To erase all priorities from the program, set the cursor on any machining priority
number and select the menu, PRI No. ALL ERAS. The control will then display
a menu prompt – ALL ERASE (PROC: 0, PROG: 1) ?

Enter 0 and press the Input key to erase all priority numbers from the process
within which the cursor is currently set.
Enter 1 and press the Input key to erase all the priority numbers from the current
program, regardless of the cursor position.

2-82
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PARAMETERS

2-83
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-84
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PARAMETERS

PRELIMINARY REMARKS
Parameters refer to constants, specific to the NC machines and
equipment, and the data necessary for cutting operations. They
possess a very important meaning.
Parameters can be broadly divided into the following three types
according to their meaning. User parameters and machine parameters
are registered in the PARAMETER display, and data input/output
parameters are registered in the DATA I/O displays corresponding to
each I/O unit.
1. User parameters.
The data required for processes such as point machining, linear
machining, plane machining, and EIA/ISO programmed
machining, is registered.
2. Machine parameters.
Constants related to the servo motors and spindle motors, machine
status data etc. are registered. (Not covered in this Manual. See
Machine Parameter Manual for more details.)
3. Data I/O parameters.
The data required for connection to external units such as a CMT
unit, and a tape unit is registered.

2-85
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PARAMETERS

FORMAT OF PARAMETER TABLES


Each parameter table is written in the following format:
Classification Display title

Address Name Description

Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

1 Parameter address displayed on the screen


2 Characters displayed at the upper left of the screen
3 M: Valid for MAZATROL program
E: Valid for EIA/ISO program
4 Conditions under which a changed parameter becomes valid
5 Units of data displayed
6 Allowable range of data
7 Details or meaning of the parameter

2-86
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

USER PARAMETERS: POINT (D)


Classification USER Display title POINT

Address Name Description

Height of the second R-point

Initial point

D1
Second R-point

MPL001
Height of the second R-point during point
machining
The heigt of the R-point during point machining is basically D41,
however, it is changed to D1 under the following conditions.
D1
Tool sequence Conditions
- Bit 6 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D1 valid).
Drill - There is a spot drill in the pre-machining tool
sequence of the same unit.
- Bit 2 of parameter D92 is set to 1 (D1 valid).
Reamer - There is a chamfering cutter in the pre-
machining tool sequence of the same unit.
Program type M
Conditions Immediate However, when a drill is included in the pre-machining tool sequence in
Unit 0.1 mm/0.1 inch case of a drilling tool sequence, the height is changed to D42. (Refer to
D42.)
Setting range –999 to 999
The nominal diameter of a spot-machining tool that is automatically set
during automatic tool development.
Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP
Nominal diameter of spot-machining tool
1 CTR-DR 20. 10.
D2
D2

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch
Setting range 0 to 99
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a spot-machining cycle. Set
this time in spindle revolutions.
When the spot-machining tool reaches
Spot-machining hole bottom dwell time the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly
element stop moving until the spindle makes D3
revolutions, and then return to the
D3 original position at the rapid feedrate.

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
(Stops at hole bottom.)
Unit 1 revolution
Setting range 0 to 9 MPL002

2-87
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Element used to set the maximum spot-chamfering hole diameter (d)


during automatic tool development

D2 Spot chamfering occurs if


Maximum allowable spot-chamfering hole d ≤ D2 – D4.
d If d > D2 – D4, the chamfering
diameter element
cutter is developed automatically.
D4

Program type M Chamfering


Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 0 to 99 MPL003

The feedrate of a tool as it is being passed through the prehole during an


inversed spot-facing cycle
Note: 0.5 mm/rev if this parameter setting is 0.
Prehole through speed during inversed
spot-facing

D5
At the feedrate of D5

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 100 mm/min / 10 inch/min MPL004

Setting range 0 to 99
Element used to automatically set drill-machining cycles during
automatic tool development

Machining cycle Conditions


Drill-machining cycle setting element DEPTH
Drilling cycle
DIA ≤ D6
D6 High-speed deep-hole DEPTH
drilling cycle D6 < DIA ≤ D7
Program type M DEPTH
Deep-hole drilling cycle
Conditions Immediate D7 < DIA
Unit
Setting range 0 to 9

Drill-machining cycle setting element

D7

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit
Setting range 0 to 9

2-88
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Element used to automatically set the number of drills which are


automatically developed according to the hole diameter of the drill unit

Maximum diameter of holes machinable Number of drills


Conditions
on one drill developed
1 DIA ≤ D8
D8 2 D8 < DIA ≤ D9
3 D9 < DIA ≤ D10
Program type M Alarm D10 < DIA
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch
Setting range 0 to 99

Maximum diameter of holes machinable


on two drills

D9
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch
Setting range 0 to 99

Maximum diameter of holes machinable


on three drills

D10
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch
Setting range 0 to 99
Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling, endmilling, and boring
depths during automatic tool development of inversed spot-facing,
tapping, back-boring, through-hole drilling, through-hole counter-boring,
and spot-faced tapping units
Through-hole/tap-prehole machining
overshoot
DEPTH DEPTH
D11 D11
D11
MPL005

Example:
Program type M
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP
Conditions Immediate
1 CTR-DR 10. 10. 21. (DEPTH +
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
D11)
Setting range 0 to 99
Note: See also parameter D30 for tapping units.

2-89
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling depth during


automatic tool development of stop-hole counter-boring and stop-hole
boring units

Stop-hole machining hole-bottom


clearance DEPTH

MPL006
D12 D12
Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP
Program type M
1 DRILL 10. 10. 19.
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch (DEPTH – tool tip compensation – D12)
Setting range 0 to 99 Note:
This parameter is invalid when the residual hole diameter is not 0.
Hole diameter is automatically set during automatic tool development
when spot chamfering is not to be performed.
D13
Spot-machining hole diameter
(fixed value)

D13 MPL007

Example:
Program type M
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP
Conditions Immediate
1 CTR-DR 20. 10.
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch
D13
Setting range 0 to 99
Element used to automatically set the depth-of-cut per drilling operation
during automatic tool development
HOLE-φ × D14 : when the material of the stock workpiece is AL
Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (aluminum) in article MAT. 6
(ALUMINUM) HOLE-φ × D15 : when the material of the stock workpiece is other than
AL in article MAT. 6
D14

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1
Setting range 0 to 10

Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling


(except AL)

D15

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1
Setting range 0 to 10

2-90
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a chamfering cutter


machining cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions.
When the chamfering cutter reaches the
Hole-bottom dwell time for chamfering hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop
cutter moving until the spindle makes D16
revolutions, and then return to the
D16 original position at the rapid feedrate.
Note:
This parameter is invalid for chamfering
Program type M with true-circle processing.
Conditions Immediate
(Stops at hole bottom.)
Unit 1 revolution MPL008
Setting range 0 to 9
The clearance in order to prevent tool interference with a wall of the
workpiece or with the hole bottom during a chamfering cycle
D17
Interference clearance of chamfering
cutter

D17 Interferes.

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch D17
Interferes. MPL009
Setting range 0 to 99
The feedrate at which the tool is returned from the hole bottom during
reaming or boring.

Return feedrate for reaming or boring D18


(cycle 3)

MPL010
D18 Notes:
1. Valid only when the setting of ZFD for the reamer (tool sequence) is
Program type M G01.
2. Valid only when the setting of PRE-DIA for the boring tool (tool
Conditions Immediate sequence) is CYCLE 3.
Unit 100 mm/min / 10 inch/min 3. If this parameter is 0, the tool is returned at the same feedrate as
that of cutting.
Setting range 0 to 9
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in an end milling cycle. Set this
time in spindle revolutions.

When the end mill reaches the hole


Hole-bottom dwell time for end milling bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop
moving until the spindle makes D19
revolutions, and then return to the
D19 original position at the rapid feedrate.

Program type M Note:


Conditions Immediate This parameter is invalid for true-circle
processing.
Unit 1 revolution (Stops at hole bottom.)
MPL011
Setting range 0 to 999

2-91
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut per end milling
operation
Depth-of-cut = nominal diameter × D20
Radial depth-of-cut setting element for Depth-of-cut is automatically set according to the value of this parameter
end milling when nominal diameter of the end mill is input.
Example:
D20 SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH
DEPTH
1 E-MILL 20. 40. 10. 30. 0.
Program type M
12.
Conditions Immediate (NOM-φ × D20)
Unit 1%
Setting range 0 to 100
The reference value for calculation of a bottom-finishing allowance,
which corresponds to the roughness level of the end milling (tool
sequence). The finishing allowance in the case of roughness level 4
becomes the value of this parameter, and the values for all other
Reference bottom-finishing allowance for
roughness levels are set using the expressions listed in the table below.
end milling
Roughness Bottom-finishing allowance
D21 0 to 3 0.0
4 D21
5 D21×0.7
Program type M 6 D21×0.7×0.7
Conditions Immediate 7 D21×0.7×0.7×0.7
8 D21×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch 9 D21×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7
Setting range 0 to 99
Dwell time at the hole bottom or at the R-point. This value is valid when 1
is set for bit 0, 1 or 2 of parameter D91.

Tapping-cycle dwell time

D22

Program type M
Note:
Conditions Immediate This parameter is valid only when the setting for roughness of tapping
Unit 0.01 sec. (tool sequence) is FIX.
Setting range 0 to 99
The excess amount of prehole diameter over nominal diameter that is
used to specify whether the Z-axis is to be moved at a rapid feedrate or
at a cutting feedrate during true-circle processing with the end mill

D23 D23
D23 Prehole clearance for end milling

Cutting feed Rapid feed MPL012

2-92
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a boring cycle. Set this time
in spindle revolutions.
When the boring bar reaches the hole
bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving
Hole-bottom dwell time for boring until the spindle makes D24 revolutions,
and then the spindle orientation will be
D24 performed.
Note:
This parameter is invalid if the roughness
Program type M
of the boring (tool sequence) is 0.
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 revolution
(Stops at hole bottom.) MPL013
Setting range 0 to 9
The amount of relief provided for the tip of a boring bar to be kept clear
of the hole wall after spindle orientation
D25

Boring-bar tip relief

D25
During boring During returning MPL014
Program type M Notes:
Conditions Immediate 1. Valid only when the setting for the prehole diameter of the boring
(tool sequence) is CYCLE 1.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
2. For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and
Setting range 0 to 99 bit 4 of I14.
The distance which the boring or back-boring tool is returned at the same
feedrate as for cutting after the tool has reached the hole bottom

Boring or back-boring hole-bottom return

D26 D26
MPL015
Has reached the Returned at the Returned at a
Program type M
hole bottom. same feedrate. rapid feedrate.
Conditions Immediate
Note:
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Not valid if the setting for the roughness of the boring (tool sequence) is 1.
Setting range 0 to 99
Invalid

D27

Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

2-93
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

The distance which the boring bar is fed in at 70% of the original feedrate
to finish the hole bottom

Bottom-finishing amount of boring

D28 D28
MPL016

The feedrate is reduced to 70% of the original value before the hole
Program type M bottom is reached.
Conditions Immediate Note:
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch Not valid if the setting for the roughness of the boring (tool sequence) is 1.
Setting range 0 to 99
The time required for a chip removal tool to complete a chip removal
operation after the tool has been positioned at the hole bottom

Chip removal time

D29

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 sec.
Setting range 0 to 99
To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for metric screws
and unified screws. In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the
depth of (D30 × pitch) in the direction of Z.
This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-
drilling depth in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit.

DEPTH

D30 ×Pitch
Number of incomplete threads in tapping
cycle D11
MPL07
D30 Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP

1 DRILL 10. 10. 19.

{DEPTH + D11 + (D30 × pitch)}

[Related parameter]
D43: Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 thread
Setting range 0 to 9

2-94
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Excess amount of tool return due to elongation of the tapper during


tapping cycle
Set this value in spindle revolutions.

Tapper elongation amount for tapping

D31 × Pitch
D31 R-point

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 revolution
Setting range 0 to 9 MPL019

The number of inertial turns in tapping cycle that the spindle has rotated
clockwise during the time from output of a spindle CCW rotation
command to the start of spindle CCW rotation
Number of spindle revolutions until
spindle CCW rotation begins in tapping
cycle

D32

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 revolution
Setting range 0 to 99
The amount of relief provided for a back-boring tool tip to be kept clear of
the prehole walls as it is being passed through the prehole in the
oriented state of the spindle
D33
Back-boring tool tip relief

D33
During back-boring During passage MPL019
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Note:
For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and bit 4
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
of I14.
Setting range 0 to 99
Invalid

D34

Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

2-95
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during


automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining
process is drilling.)
DIA
Prehole-drilling diameter setting element
for reamer (drilling)

DIA – D35
D35

Program type M MPL020


Conditions Immediate Example:
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ
Setting range 0 to 999 1 DRILL 10. 10. (DIA – D35)
Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during
automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining
process is boring.)
DIA
Prehole-drilling diameter setting element
for reamer (boring)

DIA – D36
D36

Program type M MPL020


Conditions Immediate Example:
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ
Setting range 0 to 999 1 DRILL 10. 10. (DIA – D36)
Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during
automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining
process is end milling.)
DIA
Prehole-drilling diameter setting element
for reamer (end milling)

DIA – D37
D37

Program type M MPL020


Conditions Immediate Example:
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ
Setting range 0 to 999 1 DRILL 10. 10. (DIA – D37)

2-96
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

1) In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-


machining process is boring:
DIA

Reamer-prehole diameter setting element


for boring or end milling
Boring-hole diameter
= DIA – D38
D38
MPL021
Program type M
Example:
Conditions Immediate SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch 1 BOR BAR 10. 10. (DIA – D38)
Setting range 0 to 999
2) In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-
machining process is end milling:
DIA

Reamer-prehole diameter setting element First end milling hole diameter


for end milling = DIA – D39
Second end milling hole diameter
D39 = DIA – D38
MPL022

Program type M Example:


Conditions Immediate SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ
1 E-MILL 15. 20. (DIA – D39)
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch
1 E-MILL 10. 21. (DIA – D38)
Setting range 0 to 999
Z-axis feed dwell time at the spot-faced hole bottom in an inversed spot
facing cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions.
When the inversed spot-facing tool
Spot-faced hole bottom dwell time for reaches the hole bottom, firstly the
inversed spot-facing Z-axis will stop moving until the
spindle makes D40 revolutions, and
D40 then the rotational direction of the
spindle will reverse.
(Feeding stops at
hole bottom.)
Program type M
MPL023
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 revolution
Setting range 0 to 9
R-point height of each tool in the point-machining unit

Initial point

R-point height during point-machining


R-point
D41
D41 Machining surface
Example: MPL024

Program type M Notes:


1. For the inversed spot-facing unit or the back-boring unit, this
Conditions Immediate
parameter can also be used for setting the clearance amount at the
Unit 1 mm/0.1 inch hole bottom.
Setting range 0 to 99 2. See D1 and D42 also.

2-97
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Height of the third R-point

Initial point

D42
Third R-point

MPL001

Height of the third R-point during point


machining The height of the R-point during point machining is basically D41,
however it is changed to D42 under the following conditions.
D42
Tool sequence Conditions
- Bit 6 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D42 valid).
Drill - There is a spot drill in the pre-machining tool
sequence of the same unit.
Chamfering - Bit 7 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D42 valid).
cutter - CYCLE 2 is selected for the machining cycle.

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range –999 to 999
To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws
(PT, PF, PS). In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the depth of
(D43 pitch) in the direction of Z.
This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-
drilling depth in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit.

DEPTH

D43 × Pitch
Number of incomplete threads in tapping
cycle
D11
MPL07
D43 Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP

1 DRILL 10. 10. 19.

{DEPTH + D11 + (D43 × pitch)}

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1 thread
Setting range 0 to 9

2-98
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

This parameter specifies a method of automatic calculation of the


amount of chamfering using the tapping unit.
0: Calculation using the expression shown below
Automatic calculation method for the
Amount of (MAJOR-φ + 2 PITCH) – PRE-DIA
amount of chamfering using the tapping 2
chamfering
unit =
1: Calculation using the same expression as for M32
D44 Amount of MAJOR-φ – PRE-DIA
chamfering 2
=
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Note:
Unit Select 1 if the loss of the threaded section by chamfering is likely.
Setting range 0, 1
Invalid

D45
D46
Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range
Element used to automatically set the hole depth of drilling, end milling
and boring during automatic tool development of the reamer unit

Reamer-prehole machining overshoot DEPTH DEPTH

D47 D47
D47
For drilling For end milling or boring MPL025
Program type M Example:
Conditions Immediate SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP
1 DRILL 10. 10. 21. (DEPTH +
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 inch
Setting range 0 to 999 D47)

Invalid

D48
to
D72
Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

2-99
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

Specify DEP-Z range for the end mill and the face mill from the learning
data of cutting conditions.
When learning data on the condition that DEP-Z is in the following range
has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again.
For a DEP-Z range of the end mill, set a value of DEPTH/NOM-φ (at a
unit of 0.1%) .
0 to D73 ................. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 1
D73 to D74 ............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 2
D74 to D75 ............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 3
For a DEP-Z range of the face mill, set a value of DEPTH (at a unit of
Learning of cutting conditions 0.1 mm or 0.01 inch) .
(DEP-Z range)
0 to D76 ................. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 1
D73 D76 to D77 ............. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 2
to
D77

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 inch)
Setting range 0 to 1000
Specify WID-R range for the boring bar, back boring bar and end mill
from the learning data of cutting conditions.
When learning data on the condition that WID-R is in the following range
has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again.
For a WID-R range of the boring bar and back boring bar, set a value of
DEPTH (at a unit of 0.1 mm/0.01 inch) .
0 to D78 ................. WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 1
D78 to D79 ............. WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 2
For a WID-R range of the end mill, set a value of DEPTH/NOM-φ (at a
unit of 0.1%) .
Learning of cutting conditions
0 to D80 ................. WID-R range (for end mill) 1
(WID-R range)
D78 D80 to D81 ............. WID-R range (for end mill) 2
D81 to D82 ............. WID-R range (for end mill) 3
to
D82

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 inch)
Setting range 0 to 1000

2-100
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PARAMETERS

Binary Parameters

The next section show’s a selection of Binary parameters.


Binary is a base code used by nearly all computers.

A binary parameter is made up of 8 digits, each one known as a


“BIT”. Hence the name, “8 BIT BINARY PARAMETER.”

Each bit is numbered like so.: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note, there is no bit


“8”.
The only values that can be set at each bit position are 1 or 0.(zero)

In simple terms, if you imagine a binary parameter as a row of light


switches, which can be switched either, ON or OFF.
To relate this to binary parameter’s, if you imagine that;
When a light switch is switched OFF, that would equal 0(zero),and,
when a light switch is switched ON that would equal 1, to a binary
parameter.

ON or 1

OFF or 0

Example : If the diagram above represents a bank of switches, then


to translate the information into binary, it would read 10110011.

Ofcourse, ON and OFF, have been used in this explaination, as a


simple way of showing opposites. Other examples maybe:
Up/Down, Right/Left, Inside out/ Outside in. etc.

CHANGING BINARY PRAMETERS.


To change Binary Parameters, one inportant rule must be followed,
that is, that the parameter MUST be changed as a single unit.!!!
It is not possable to address individual bit positions.

2-101
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PARAMETERS

Binary Parameters

Example: If we have our Binary Parameter set like so; 10110011,


and we wish to change bit 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Then we would have to say; 10111011 INPUT. This would change


the parameter as required.

Note: Always make a copy of the Binary Parameter, BEFORE you


change it. Never guess at what it may have been set too, should you
make a mistake when setting it.

Classification USER Display title POINT

76543210 (1: Execution, 0: No execution)

M04 is output after the tool has dwelled at the


hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
The tool dwells after M04 has been output at the
hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
The tool dwells after it has been returned to the
R-point during a tapping cycle.
If a drill is used in the pre-machining of the
centering drill cycle, the R-point height is set as
D1.
The finishing tool path is shortened during a true-
D91 circle processing cycle (end milling).
The tool path is shortened during a true-circle
processing cycle (chamfering).
If a pre-machining tool sequence is included in
the same unit, the R-point height of the drill is set
as D1 or D42.
The R-point height of the chamfering cutter
during the cycle 2 is set as D42.

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

2-102
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title POINT

76543210 (1: Execution, 0: No execution)

During a true-circle processing (end milling)


cycle, E17 is used for axial feed.
The R1-point height of the back spot facing is set
as D1.
D92
If a chamfering cutter is included in the pre-
machining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-
point height of the reamer is set as D1.
If a chamfering cutter is included in the pre-
machining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-
point height of the tapping is set as D1.
Unidirectional positioning for point-machining
76543210 (1: Execution, 0: No execution)

CTR-DR (Spot-machining tool)


DRILL (Drill)
REAM (Reamer)
D93 TAP (Tap)
BK FACE (Inversed spot-facing tool)
BOR BAR (Boring tool)
Program type M
B-B BAR (Back-boring tool)
Conditions Immediate
CHF-M (Chamfering cutter)
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits
Unidirectional positioning for point-machining

76543210 (1: Execution, 0: No execution)

E-MILL (End mill)

D94

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits
Invalid

D95
to
D108
Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

2-103
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

LINE/FACE/3D PARAMETERS
Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Element used to set cutting start point and escape point for closed-
pattern line- or face-machining
Example:
Closed-pattern cutting start point and Defined closed pattern Defined closed
pattern
escape point setting element
SRV-R
E1 E2 E2

E1 Cutting Escape E1
Program type M
start point point MPL026
Conditions Immediate
[Applicable units]
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch - LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN
Setting range 0 to 999 - Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT and PCKT VLY
Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point for line- or
face-machining
Example:
NOM-φ/2 ≥ SRV-R
E2

Cutting SRV-R Escape point


Cutting start point and escape point E2
start point
setting element (the first clearance)
NOM-φ/2 < SRV-R
E2 E2

Cutting Escape point


start point E2 SRV-R MPL027
[Applicable units]
- All line-machining units
Program type M - Face-machining units other than FACE MIL, TOP EMIL, and SLOT
Conditions Immediate Notes:
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch 1. See the diagram of parameter E1 also.
2. Positioning of E2 at the escape point can be selected using E95, but
Setting range 0 to 999
only for line-machining units.
Invalid

E3

Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range

2-104
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

The reference value of each finishing allowance R (FIN-R), which is


automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-
machining units have been set.
The finishing allowance R in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the
Reference allowance of finishing in radial value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are
direction calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.
Roughness FIN-R
E4 0 to 3 0.0
4 E4
5 E4×0.7
Program type M 6 E4×0.7×0.7
Conditions Immediate 7 E4×0.7×0.7×0.7
8 E4×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
9 E4×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7
Setting range 0 to 999
Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second
clearance)
E2 is used generally as a clearance on the X-Y plane, however, E5 is
used when the condition meets both of 1) and 2) mentioned below.
1) There is pre-machining in the same unit.
2) The parameter (E91 to E95) that makes E5 effective is set to ON (1).
[Applicable units]
LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, POCKT MT, PCKT VLY
[Related parameters]
Element used to set the cutting start point E91 bit 3
and escape point (the second clearance) E92 bit 3
E93 bit 3 Parameter that effectuates E5 in the applicable unit.
E5 E94 bit 3
E95 bit 7

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 0 to 999
The reference value of each finishing allowance, Z (FIN-Z), which is
automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-
machining units have been set.
The finishing allowance Z, in the case of roughness level 4, becomes the
Reference allowance of finishing in axial value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are
direction calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.

E6 Roughness FIN-Z
0 to 3 0.0
4 E6
5 E6×0.7
Program type M
6 E6×0.7×0.7
Conditions Immediate 7 E6×0.7×0.7×0.7
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch 8 E6×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7
Setting range 0 to 999 9 E6×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7×0.7

2-105
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction


For the line- or face-machining, E9 is used as an axial clearance for
rapid access to the machining point from the initial point, however, E7 is
used when the condition meets both of 1) and 2) mentioned below.
1) There is pre-machining in the same unit.
2) The parameter (E91 to E97) that makes E7 effective is set to ON (1).
[Applicable units]
All line-/face-machining units except the face milling and angular face
unit.
[Related parameters]
Allowance of cutting start point in axial E91 bit 2
direction (the second clearance) E92 bit 2
E93 bit 2
E7 E94 bit 2 Parameter that effectuates E7 in the applicable unit.
E95 bit 6
E96 bit 1
E97 bit 2

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 0 to 999
The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering
cutter with the hole walls during face-machining
E8
Radial interference clearance of
chamfering cutter

E8
Interferes.

Program type M
Conditions Immediate Interference distance MPL028
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 0 to 999
Element used to set the position in which the cutting feed in axial
direction is to be started after the line- or face-machining tool has been
moved from the initial point toward the workpiece at a rapid feedrate

Allowance of axial-cutting start position Example:


(the first clearance) Initial point

E9 E9
SRV-Z

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
MPL029
Setting range 0 to 999

2-106
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut of the tool


sequence in FACE MIL, TOP EMIL or STEP unit
NOM-φ × E10
Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element 10
WID-R =
(Face milling, End milling-top, End milling-
step) Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z
E10 WID-R
R1 F-MILL 100A ? ? XBI 1.
19.
Program type M
Conditions Immediate NOM-φ × E10
Unit 10% 10
Setting range 0 to 9
The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering
cutter with the hole bottom during chamfering

Axial interference clearance of chamfering


cutter

E11 E11

Interference depth Interferes.


Program type M MPL030
Conditions Immediate
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 5 to 40
The amount of clearance that prevents interference between the tool and
the figure during face milling
Example:
Radial interference clearance of face Escape point Defined figure
milling unit and angular face milling unit

E12

Program type M Cutting


Conditions Immediate start point
E12 E12
MPL031
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
Setting range 0 to 999
Element used to set the tool path internal to the figure for end milling-top
unit
Example:
Tool path setting element for end milling-
top unit
Tool diameter × E13
10
E13
Tool diameter × E13
10
Program type M
Defined figure MPL032
Conditions Immediate
Unit 10%
Setting range 1 to 9

2-107
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut of the tool


sequence in POCKET, PCKT MT or PCKT VLY unit

Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element NOM- E14


(Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, WID-R = 10
Pocket milling-valley) Example:
E14 SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z
WID-R
R1 E-MILL 20. ? ? CW G01 10.
Program type M
12.
Conditions Immediate
Unit 10% NOM-φ × E14
Setting range 0 to 9 10

Element used to set the tool path external to the defined figure for
reciprocating-short machining with face milling unit
Example:
Tool path setting element for face milling-
top unit
Tool diameter × E15
(reciprocating short) 10

E15

Program type M Tool diameter × E15


10
Conditions Immediate
Defined figure MPL033
Unit 10%
Setting range 1 to 9
Override value of the idle-cutting feedrate at which tool of end milling-
mountain unit is to be moved around the outer form of the workpiece
Note:
Peripheral-cutting feedrate override for Valid only when bit 0 of E91 is 1 and its bit 7 is 0.
end milling-mountain unit Defined figure

E16
FR × E16 FR

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit MPL034
Example:
Setting range 1 to 20
Override value of the feedrate at which the tool of a line- or face-
machining unit (excluding face milling unit) is to be moved to the
machining surface in an axial direction
Notes:
Axial-cutting feedrate override 1. Valid only when ZFD of tool sequence is G01.
2. Feed overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.

E17

E17
Program type M FR × E9 SRV-Z
10
Conditions Immediate
Machining
Unit 10% surface
Example: MPL035
Setting range 0 to 9

2-108
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Override value of feedrate when the pocket-machining radial depth-of-


cut becomes equal to the tool diameter
Example:
Override in case of the overall width FR × E18
cutting for pocket-machining 10

E18
MPL036
Program type M Note:
Conditions Immediate Overriding for overall width cutting is not valid when this parameter is 0.

Unit 10% [Applicable units]


Rough-machining of POCKET, PCKT MT and PCKT VLY
Setting range 0 to 9
Override value of tool returning feedrate in the rough-machining process
of the end milling-slot unit, when the bi-directional cutting is executed.
E19
FR × 100
Returning feedrate override in case of bi-
directional cutting for rough machining of
Note:
the end milling-slot unit.
The override value is invalid, when bit 5 of parameter E96 is set to OFF,
E19 or this parameter is set to 0.
[Applicable unit]
Returning path in rough-machining of SLOT
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1%
Setting range 0 to 999
Invalid

E20

Program type
Conditions
Unit
Setting range
The amount of overlap of the wall-cutting start and end areas in closed-
pattern line- or face-machining
Example:
Defined closed pattern
Wall-cutting overlap in closed figure

E21
Escape point Cutting start
E21 point
Program type M MPL037
Conditions Immediate [Applicable units]
- LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 inch
- Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY and SLOT
Setting range 0 to 999

2-109
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

Override value of automatic corner overriding in line- or face-machining


Example:

FR × E22
Override value of automatic corner over- 10
riding FR

E22
MPL038
Note:
Program type M Automatic corner overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.
Conditions Immediate [Applicable units]
Unit 1% LINE RGT, LINE LFT, LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT
Setting range 0 to 99 and PCKT VLY

The range of removal allowances (upper and lower limits)


The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line-
or face-machining conditions are met:

Effective removal allowance (upper limit) Tool E24 Removal Tool E23
of automatic corner overriding diameter × 100 ≤ allowance ≤ diameter × 100

E23
Removal allowance
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1%
Setting range 1 to 99
MPL039

Effective removal allowance (lower limit) Machining Removal allowance


of automatic corner overriding Line-rough machining (SRV-R) – (FIN-R )

E24 Face-rough machining (WID-R)

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit 1%
Setting range 1 to 99
The shape angle range (upper limit)
The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line-
or face-machining conditions are met:
Effective angle (upper limit) of automatic Shape angle ≤ E25
corner overriding Shape angle

E25
Program type M
Conditions Immediate
MPL040
Unit 1°
Setting range 1 to 179
Program type

2-110
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside
1: Machining from outside to inside
0: Cutting direction inversed
1: Cutting direction fixed
0: The R-point height is set always as E9.
1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
unit, respectively.
0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always as
E2.
1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set as E5 or
E2 when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the
same unit, respectively.
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
0: Tool path based on inside shape
1: Tool path based on outside shape
Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-
mountain unit Notes:
1. If bit 0 = 0, tool path based on inside shape is selected
E91 automatically, irrespective of value of bit 7.
2. If bit 0 = 1 and bit 7 = 0, fixed direction of cutting is selected
automatically, irrespective of value of bit 1.
3. Bit 4 becomes valid only for two or more rounds of cutting.

Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1

E9 Initial point
E7

1st cutting
2nd cutting

MPL055

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside
1: Machining from outside to inside
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket 0: The R-point height is set always as E9.
milling unit 1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
E92 unit, respectively.
0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always as
E2.
Program type M 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set as E5 or
Conditions Immediate E2 when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the
same unit, respectively.
Unit Bit
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
Setting range Binary, eight digits

2-111
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

76543210

0: Machining from inside to outside


1: Machining from outside to inside
0: Cutting direction inversed
1: Cutting direction fixed
0: The R-point height is set always as E9.
1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
unit, respectively.
0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always as
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket
E2.
milling-mountain unit
1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set as E5 or
E2 when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the
E93 same unit, respectively.
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside
1: Machining from outside to inside
0: Cutting direction inversed
1: Cutting direction fixed
0: The R-point height is set always as E9.
1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
unit, respectively.
0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always as
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket
E2.
milling-valley unit 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set as E5 or
E2 when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the
E94 same unit, respectively.
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

2-112
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

76543210
For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting:
0: Not via the approach point
1: Via the approach point
For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting:
0: Escape to the Z-axis initial point
1: No escape on the Z-axis
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
1: Escape is set to a point where the tool comes
out of the removal allowance.
The R-point height for central, right hand, left
hand, outside and inside linear machining is:
0: Set always as E9
1: Set as E7 or E9 when there is or isn’t pre-
machining in the same unit, respectively.
The X-Y plane clearance for outside and inside
linear machining is:
0: Set always as E2
1: Set as E5 or E2 when there is or isn’t pre-
machining in the same unit, respectively.
- Bit 2
Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2 = 0

Initial point

Tool-path pattern selection for line-


machining unit
1st removal allowance
E95 2nd removal allowance

Approach point Cutting start point


MPL501

- Bit 3
Approach point Escape point

Bit 3 = 0
Initial point

1st removal allowance


Bit 3 = 1 2nd removal allowance

MPL502

- Bit 5
Bit 5 = 0 Bit 5 = 1
E2

Escape point E2
Program type M WID-R
MPL503
Conditions Immediate
Note:
Unit Bit
Bit 3 valid only for inside/outside linear machining unit.
Setting range Binary, eight digits

2-113
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D

Address Name Description

76543210
0: The R-point height is set always as E9.
1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
Tool-path pattern selection for end milling- there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
slot unit unit, respectively.
For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting:
E96 0: Not via the approach point
1: Via the approach point
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
Program type M
Returning feedrate override of the end milling-
Conditions Immediate slot unit
Unit Bit 0: Invalid
1: Valid
Setting range Binary, eight digits

76543210
0: The R-point height is set always as E9
1: The R-point height is set as E7 or E9 when
Tool-path pattern selection for end milling- there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
top unit unit, respectively.
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
E97

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

76543210

: The 1st cutting amount exceeds the command


Cutting method selection for end milling- value at end milling-mountain or pocket valley
machining.
mountain, pocket milling-valley unit

E98

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

76543210

This bit specifies the returning position for each


cutting operation during face machining.
Tool path selection 0: Clearance point
1: Initial point
E104

Program type M
Conditions Immediate
Unit Bit
Setting range Binary, eight digits

2-114
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

T.P.C. INFORMATION

2-115
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2-116
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
It is possible to set T.P.C. (TOOL PATH CONTROL) Data for any MACHINING
Unit within a program. T.P.C. allows you to perform two different functions:

1. To control the approach and escape path of a tool. This can be done by
establishing RELAY POINTS through which the tool must travel, so as to
avoid interference.

2. To perform LOCAL Parameter changes. These changes will only affect the
setting of the controlling parameters within the selected unit.

T.P.C data can be entered for all MACHINING type units, but does not apply to
non-machining units such as the W.P.C, Index or Offset units for example.

To enter T.P.C. data into the control firstly position the cursor on the header line of
the unit, make sure the program is in EDIT MODE then press the F12 key from the
function keys. Then select T.P.C. from the menu options. (See below)

2-117
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Once this area has been entered the display will change.

The top section of the screen displays a selection of parameters and their current
global settings. These parameters are applicable to the type of unit to which you
are applying T.P.C. you may change these settings LOCALLY, the revised value
will only be valid for this one unit.

To alter the path which the tool will take as it travels to, and/or escapes from the
work-piece, position the cursor on the AUTO statement found in the lower section
of the display. An amended tool path can be entered by changing the AUTO to
MANUAL by selecting the menu key option.

Once this is selected the cursor will allow you to enter RELAY POINT area
Where you may enter X,Y AND Z Co-ordinates through which the tool will
travel.

2-118
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Points can be stated on either approach, escape path or both. The co-ordinates use
the Work-piece co-ordinate system and so are stated from datum point on the job.
A maximum of three positions can be entered for approach and the same for
escape. The points will be processed in the line order they are entered, point 1 first
to point 3 last.

APPROACH RELAY POINTS

P1: X__Y__Z__
P2: X__Y__Z__
P3: X__Y__Z__

P2

P1

P3

WORKPIECE

2-119
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Once the T.P.C. information has been set, to return to program select T.P.C. END
from the menu options.

To remove all T.P.C. edits from the currently displayed screen press T.P.C
CANCEL from the menu options, then type –9999 INPUT. On doing this all relay
points are erased and the MANU changes back to AUTO. Any changes made
locally to parameter settings revert back to their global setting.

If T.P.C. has been successfully set on a unit then when you return to the program
display a + is visible to the left of unit number.

2-120
640M PROGRAMMING COURSE CONTENTS

DAY 3

3. Step Machining ............................................................. 3-1


Shape Rotate ................................................................. 3-13
Arbitrary Geometry....................................................... 3-19
Program Example No.7................................................. 3-25
Program Example No.8................................................. 3-29
Slot Machining.............................................................. 3-33
Offset Unit (Program Example No.9) ........................... 3-37
Sub Programs ................................................................ 3-47
Program Example No.10............................................... 3-53
Program Example No.11............................................... 3-59
Pallet Change Unit ........................................................ 3-65
Index Unit ..................................................................... 3-69
Process Control ............................................................. 3-73
Manual Programming ................................................... 3-77
M Codes ........................................................................ 3-93
Program Example No.13............................................... 3-97
Program Example No.14............................................... 3-101
Program Example No.15............................................... 3-105
Program Example No.16............................................... 3-113

C-3
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

STEP MACHINING UNIT

3-1
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-2
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.6

3-3
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-4
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

STEP MACHINING

The STEP MACHINING unit, like all FACE MACHINING units, is an area removal
cycle. It is used when it is required to machine around the perimeter of an outside shape,
where the stock removal in the X/Y plane exceeds the diameter of the cutter being used, or
where machining is best performed by taking a number of passes around the profile.

UNo. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI-MODE MULTI-FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y


0 ALY STL 10. 0 OFF ♦ ♦ ♦

UNo. UNIT ADD.WPC X Y θ Z 4


1 WPC-0 0. 0. 0. 0. ♦

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 4 6 0.6 0.294

DEPTH

FIN-R

SRV-Z

FIN-Z

Under the STEP MACHINING main unit data, you are required to specify both a
‘Bottom Roughness’ code for ‘Z’ and a ‘Wall Roughness’ code for the ‘radial’ profile.
This is also applicable to POCKET, POCKET MOUNT and POCKET VALLEY
machining units.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-Ø No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 11.2 69 0.156 8
F2 E-MILL 13. A ? ? CW G01 ♦ 9.1 69 0.128 8

For Explanation of the Tool Sequence data, see the section relating to Face Machining.

3-5
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-Ø No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 11.2 69 0.156 8
F2 E-MILL 13. A ? ? CW G01 ♦ 9.1 69 0.128 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 100. 100.
FIG PTN X Y R/θ I J P CNR
2 LINE 50. 10.
3 LINE 10. 50.
4 LINE 50. 90.
5 LINE 90. 50.
6 LINE 50. 10.

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


For STEP MACHINING, you are required to enter two (2) shapes, the outer shape must
always be programmed first followed by the inner shape. Both shapes must be fully
enclosed patterns. This is also applicable to POCKET MOUNT and POCKET
VALLEY machining units.

[P1X/CX] CORNER 1 COORDINATE X ?


[P1Y/CY] CORNER 1 COORDINATE Y ?
When machining begins, starting from the outer shape, as is normally desired, (see note
below), CORNER 1 is especially relevant. The initial position from where the cutter starts
its feed, the approach point, will be calculated close to the mid position of the line that is
drawn prior to corner 1. Imagining a clockwise development of the square, this line is the
last side of the square.

Note:
Generally, machining will commence from the outer shape and work in towards the inner
shape. (This is dependent on User Parameter E91, refer to the section on Parameters
listed in the day 2 documentation.)

[P3X/R] CORNER 3 COORDINATE X ?


[P3Y] CORNER 3 COORDINATE Y ?
Corner No.3 is entered as the diagonal corner from corner No.1

After completing the description of the outside shape be describing it as a square, move
the cursor down onto a new figure line. If necessary, it is now possible to view the first
shape by using the CHECK function.

3-6
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
To describe the Inside shape it is necessary to use the ARBITRY shape pattern. Although
in terms of geometry the inside shape is technically a square, for programming purposes
on the Mazatrol control, a milling unit square can only be defined providing that the four
Sides of the shape are parallel to the X and Y-axes. As we can see from the diagram
below, the sides of the shape are at an angle of 45° from either axis. Therefore an
ARBITRY shape pattern must be selected.

Y Axis

Inner Shape

X Axis

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU> ?


Choose the ARBITRY figure pattern and enter the first co-ordinate point by using the
LINE menu.

Using a series of LINE patterns completes the description of the second shape. (For a
detailed example of an ARBITRY figure pattern, refer to the LINE OUT section listed in
program example No.3)

After completing the second shape pattern, cursor down onto a new figure line. If
necessary, it is possible to view both the outer shape and the inner shape together by using
the CHECK facility. To complete the unit, press the SHAPE END menu twice.

3-7
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 6-PROGRAM LISTING

USING SQUARE AND ARBITRARY SHAPE

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALY STL 10. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 * 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 12. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 5.6 13 0.061 8
F 2 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 * 5.6 15 0.128 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 100. 100.
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 LINE 50. 10.
3 LINE 10. 50.
4 LINE 50. 90.
5 LINE 90. 50.
6 LINE 50. 10.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


4 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-8
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAMMING OF 2 ARBITRY FIGURE PATTERNS WITHIN A SINGLE UNIT

For the programming of STEP MACHINING, POCKET MOUNT and POCKET


VALLEY units, it is necessary to describe two patterns within the unit. Firstly the outer
shape and secondly, the inner shape.
The example described above shows a combination of a SQUARE and an ARBITRY
pattern. For this combination, the control will automatically separate the two different
shapes. However, a combination of two ARBITRY shapes will require a special format to
separate them from each other. To demonstrate this procedure, we can re-program the
above example (No.6), to consist of two ARBITRY shapes.

The first co-ordinate point for the outer ARBITRY shape will be at the X and Y program
datum point for this exercise. Programming a series of LINE patterns completes the
outside square. The figure line data listed below shows the completion of the first shape.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-Ø No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 11.2 69 0.156 8
F2 E-MILL 13. A ? ? CW G01 ♦ 9.1 69 0.128 8
FIG PTN X Y R/θ I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. 0.
2 LINE 0. 100.
3 LINE 100. 100.
4 LINE 100. 0.
5 LINE 0. 0.

To begin the programming of the second shape, it is important to establish a separation


between the two ARBITRY figures. This is achieved by, first, pressing the STARTING
POINT menu so that the menu is shown in reverse, and then, secondly pressing the LINE
menu.

1. Press the STARTING POINT menu first.

3-9
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2. Press the LINE menu second.

The combination of STARTING POINT and LINE will highlight the beginning of the
second shape by displaying the figure line in blue. The first LINE on the second shape,
similar to the first LINE on the first shape, is merely to represent the starting co-ordinate
point for the shape. The second shape is completed through a combination of LINE
patterns, (similar to the first method of programming). The complete figure line data is
listed below for both shapes, with the starting points of both shapes boxed in for reference.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-Ø No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 11.2 69 0.156 8
F2 E-MILL 13. A ? ? CW G01 ♦ 9.1 69 0.128 8
FIG PTN X Y R/θ I J P CNR
[1 LINE 0. 0.]
2 LINE 0. 100.
3 LINE 100. 100.
4 LINE 100. 0.
5 LINE 0. 0.
[6 LINE 50. 10.]
7 LINE 10. 50.
8 LINE 50. 90.
9 LINE 90. 50.
10 LINE 50. 10.

Note: Ref. Tool Path on STEP MACHINING, POCKET MOUNT and


POCKET VALLEY units
After completing the rough machining and depending on the programmed finish
allowances, the finishing operation is performed in two stages. If there is a finishing
allowance for both the Z-axis and radially (X/Y), the order of finishing will be to finish the
surface in Z first and then, to conduct an independent finishing pass around the radial
profile(s).

3-10
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE6 PROGRAM LISTING

USING TWO ARBITRARY SHAPES

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALY STL 10. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4.5 4.5 * 4 6 0.6 0.294
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 12. A ? ? CW G01 3.9 5.6 13 0.061
F 2 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 * 11.2 15 0.256
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR

1 LINE 0. 0. SPT.PT
2 LINE 0. 100.
3 LINE 100. 100.
4 LINE 100. 0.
5 LINE 0. 0.

6 LINE 50. 10. SPT.PT


7 LINE 10. 50.
8 LINE 50. 90.
9 LINE 90. 50.
10 LINE 50. 10.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-11
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-12
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SHAPE ROTATE

3-13
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-14
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SHAPE ROTATE

SHAPE ROTATE is used to reduce the programming input data for repeating
shape patterns that rotate around a common centre point.

Examples of SHAPE ROTATE.


SHAPE ROTATE (CW and CCW)

(CW) ROTATE (CCW) ROTATE

Defined shape
r r

Y j Workpiece Y j Workpiece Defined shape


zero point zero point

X i X i

M3P321

As we can see from the two diagrams shown above, SHAPE ROTATE can be
used to rotate a shape in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

HOW TO PROGRAM AN ARBITRY PATTERN USING SHAPE


ROTATE.

To demonstrate the use of SHAPE ROTATE, the arbitry shape pattern on


example No.3 can be reprogrammed. -Reference program No. 43.

FIGURE LINE 1

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>?


The SHAPE ROTATE menu must be selected prior to the description of the
shape being rotated. Therefore, from the arbitry shape menu selection, press the
menu SHAPE ROTATE.

3-15
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>?


The menu displayed following the SHAPE ROTATE menu choice will offer
either a clockwise (CW) or a counterclockwise (CCW) direction of shift. The
shape should be rotated in the direction that the geometry is to be programmed. In
the case of the example being programmed select the CW SHIFT menu.

>5 @ RADIUS R?
[I] ARC CENTRE COORDINATE-X?
[J] ARC CENTRE COORDINATE-Y?
The radius (of rotation) value will be the distance from the start (or end) point of
the pattern, to the centre point of rotation. The arc centre coordinate in the X-axis
and Y-axis represents the centre point coordinate about which the shape will be
rotated. Only the radius of rotation value, or, the arc centre coordinates need be
entered, - not both. In the case of the example being programmed;
R =?, I = 0, J = 0

CENTER OF
ROTATION
END POINT

RADIUS OF
ROTATION

START
POINT

3-16
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
NOTE
If only the radius is known, the arc centre coordinates can be questioned (?) to
provide a solution. Similarly, in a situation where only the arc centre coordinates
are known, the radius could be questioned to provide a solution.

[P] NUMBER OF REPEATS FOR SHAPE?


Specify the number of repeats required in rotating the pattern to produce the
required completed shape. Count the partial pattern to be defined as the first
repeat. In the case of the example being programmed, the number of repeats = 4.

FIGURE LINE 2

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>


The starting point on an arbitry shape is always entered using the LINE definition.

FIGURE LINE 3

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>


If a clockwise direction of programming around the shape is assumed, the first
120mm radius will be entered as CCW. For the rules regarding the interpolation
centre and the intersection point calculation, refer to the explanation listed with
example No.3 from day 2.

FIGURE LINE 4

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>


The second 120mm radius will again be entered in as CCW.
As this will be the last geometry point entered in to complete the shape to be
rotated, it is important to finish at a known point, (in this example, X-40. Y0.),
also entering the arc radius and centre point values.

FIGURE LINE 5

[PTN] PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>


To establish the end of the pattern to be rotated, choose the menu REPEAT END.

3-17
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-18
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

ARBITRARY GEOMETRY

3-19
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-20
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

ARBITRARY SHAPE GEOMETRY


An arbitrary shape does not have to be completely symmetrical as illustrated.
The non symmetrical part of the geometry can simply be defined outside of the
CW/CCW SHAPE ROTATE.......REPEAT END loop but must still be defined
within the current unit.
See Program.

X50.0
Y40.0

R8

R56

R5

X75.0
Y-40.0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


2 LINE OUT 10. 10. 10. 5 * 0.42 0.42
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 32. ? ? CW G01 9.58 * 12 0.081
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 CW-SH * * 0. 0. 2 *
2 LINE 0. -40.
3 CCW ? ? 120. 0. -160. UP R 10.
4 CCW -40. 0. 120. -160. 0.
5 REP-EN * * * * * * *
6 LINE 50. 40. R 8.
7 CCW 75. -40. 56. R 5.
8 LINE 0. -40.

3-21
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

If a LINE figure has no known start point or end point, and no angles or vectors are
entered for this LINE, then the control will assume that this figure line must be
tangent to the previous and subsequent arc geometries.
Referring to the Program, and strictly applying the INTERSECTION POINT rule:
Figure line 2 should contain an UP intersection point
Figure line 3 should contain an UP intersection point
Figure line 4 should contain a DOWN intersection point
Figure line 5 should contain a DOWN intersection point
(Note, choices of LEFT or RIGHT could also possibly be made but in this example
UP or DOWN choices can be visualised more clearly).
If no intersection point answers have been entered, then with regard to LINEs
drawn tangent to arcs, the control will generate the ’smoothest’ geometry possible.

?
? R25

? X125.
S Y40.

R50

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


1 LINE OUT 5. 5. 5. 1 * 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. ? ? CW G01 5. * 150 0.3
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE -50. 0.
2 CW ? ? 50. 0. 0.
3 LINE ? ?
4 CW ? ? 25. 125. 40.
5 LINE ? ?
6 CW -50. 0. 50. 0. 0.

3-22
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

If a CORNER RADIUS is defined between two non-intersecting arc figure lines,


the Corner Radius will be drawn tangent to these arcs. To generate a Clockwise
direction Corner Radius, the radius value must be entered as positive. To generate a
Counter-clockwise direction Corner Radius, the radius value must be entered as
negative.

R 360.

?
R25
?

? X125.
S
Y40.
R50
? R 240.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


2 LINE OUT 5. 5. 5. 1 * 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. ? ? CW G01 5. * 150 0.3
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE -50. 0.
2 CW ? ? 50. 0. 0. R 360.
3 CW ? ? 25. 140. 40. R -240.
4 CW -50. 0. 50. 0. 0.

3-23
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-24
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.7

3-25
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-26
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-27
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 7- PROGRAM LISTING

USING SHAPE ROTATE

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 STAINLS 15. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 G59 *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 4. 4. * 5 5 0.42 0.42
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 3.58 5.6 13 0.035 8
F 2 E-MILL 16. B ? ? CW G01 * 11.2 53 0.16 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 100. 100.
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 CW-SH * * 50. 50. 4 *
3 LINE 50. 5.
4 CW ? ? 45. 50. 50. RGT R 5.
5 CCW ? ? 30. 5. 5. LEFT R 5.
6 CW 5. 50. 45. 50. 50.
7 REP-EN * * * * * * *

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-28
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.8

3-29
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-30
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-31
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 8-PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 STNLESS 10. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 5. 5. * 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 11.2 14 0.1
F 2 E-MILL 8. A ? ? CW G01 * 5.6 14 0.416
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 CIR 0. 0. 65. * * * * *
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 CW-SH * * 0. 0. 4 *
3 LINE 0. -55.
4 CW -15. -40. 15. R 5.
5 LINE -40. -40. R 10.
6 LINE -40. -15. R 5.
7 CW -55. 0. 15.
8 REP-EN * * * * * * *

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


5 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-32
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SLOT MACHINING UNIT

3-33
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-34
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SLOT MACHINING
SLOT is a face machining cycle, but unlike other units of this type it is NOT an area
clearance routine. It is used when a full radius ended slot is required and should not be
confused with a pocketing cycle. The slot must be produced using a cutter the diameter of
which is greater than half the slot width. Information regarding the unit is given below

Uno. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6

SLOT unit

Workpiece zero point

FIN-R Finishing
Shape sequence entered Roughing

............
............ DEPTH
............
............
............
............
SRV-Z ............
............
............

FIN-Z
SLOT-WID M3P284

Uno. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6

Sno. TOOL NOM.DIA. No. APRCH-X APRCH-Z TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R1 E-MILL 16A ? ? CCW G01 4.4 ♦ 43 0.2 8
F2 E-MILL 13A ? ? CCW G01 ♦ ♦ 43 0.2 8

FIG PTN X Y R/θ I J P CNR


1 LINE 0 65.
2 LINE 0 35.

No selection is needed for the appropriate figure pattern as the figure data for the slot
unit is automatically set as an arbitary shape. The control already knows the final width of
the slot, this is set on the unit header line, and hence the figure pattern data is based on the
programming of the centre line of the detail. It is not possible to enter two shapes within a
Slot unit, the Shape End key only needs pressing once when ending the unit.

3-35
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-36
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

OFFSET UNIT

3-37
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-38
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.9


USING OFFSET UNIT

3-39
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-40
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

OFFSET

In the process of programming, the workpiece zero point can be offset to any position
in order to facilitate the entering of data. In order to do this, it is necessary to enter the
auxiliary coordinate system unit.
With the cursor currently located at the head of a new unit whilst in full program edit
mode, press the menu key OFFSET.

Once selected, the offset unit will then be displayed with the following prompts:

WPC 0 POINT
Y

X
W(Z)

Y D (Ø)
OFFSET 0 POINT

V(Y)

U(X)

[U(X)] AUXILIARY COORDINATE, OFS-X?


This represents the distance and direction that the workpiece datum point is to be
shifted along the X-axis from the original WPC position.

[V (Y)] AUXILIARY COORDINATE, OFS-Y?


This represents the distance and direction that the workpiece datum point is to be
shifted along the Y-axis from the original WPC position.

3-41
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

>' @ $8;,/,$5<&225',1$7(2)6 ?
This represents the angular amount and direction that the workpiece datum point is to
be rotated about the Z-axis from the original WPC position.

[W (Z)] AUXILIARY COORDINATE, OFS-Z?


This represents the distance and direction that the workpiece datum point is to be
shifted along the Z-axis from the original W.P.C position.

Note: When entered, the values written within the OFFSET unit remain valid until
cancelled. In order to return to the original workpiece zero point, enter zero in U(X),
9 < ' DQG: = 

Each time it is required to machine the same feature but in a different position, the
offset unit is written to establish the amount of shift required before the sub program is
then called.
The format of program number 9 shows repeated offset and sub program calls until all
8 slots have been machined. Before the machining of the 4 holes in each corner can
take place, the active auxiliary offset must be cancelled as shown in Unit no.18.

See the following page for the programming structure of the main programme up to
unit no. 18.

3-42
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 9-PROGRAM LISTING

USING SLOT AND OFFSET UNIT

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 COPPER 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 1. * 5 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 125. A ? ? XUN * 1. 87.5 330 1.321 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -100. -100. 100. 100.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


3 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


4 OFFSET 0 0 45. 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


5 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


6 OFFSET 0 0 90. 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


7 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


8 OFFSET 0 0 135. 0

3-43
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


9 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


10 OFFSET 0 0 180.0 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


11 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


12 OFFSET 0 0 225. 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


13 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


14 OFFSET 0 0 270. 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


15 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


16 OFFSET 0 0 315. 0

3-44
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


17 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207 8
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


18 OFFSET 0 0 0. 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


19 DRILLING 15. 21. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 65 0.09 8
2 DRILL 15. 15. 21. 0. 100 DRILT 7.5 65 0.196 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR 0. -87.5 -87.5 0. 90. 175. 175. 0 2 2 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


20 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-45
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-46
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SUB-PROGRAMS

3-47
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-48
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SUB-PROGRAMS

When the same movements are repeated in a machining process or when a common
movement is used in several programs, it is often useful to prepare and call up a special
program for these movements by the use of a sub-program. The sub-program format is very
similar to that of the main program whereby any work number from 1-99999999 can be
used, and will be listed within the Program File display along with all other programs that are
currently in the memory.

When a main program branches into the sub-program, this is referred to as a one level
nesting operation. If within the sub-program it is required to then branch into another sub-
program, this is known as a two level nesting operation. This procedure can be repeated until
a nesting depth of NINE levels has been reached.

The example below shows where the programming of a common feature, in this case a slot
can be improved by the use of a sub-program call.

The slot can be programmed once (any slot can be selected). For this example we will select
the slot located at the 12 o’clock position. The slot-machining unit can be placed in a sub-
program (see program listing No.110). In order to produce the other seven slots we will need
to offset the slot unit from the originally defined position.

Both sub-program calls and offset commands for this operation will be established from
with-in the main machining program.(see program listing No.10)

3-49
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SUB-PROGRAM CALL
The procedure for calling up a Sub-Program from another program is described below.
The control must be in PROGRAM EDIT mode, with the ENABLE Key over. Firstly
Select OTHER from the machining unit Menu.

Pressing the Other Key will then display miscellaneous menu options that are used for
special requirements other than machining. Select SUB-PROGRAM from the list.

Once selected, the Sub-Program unit will be displayed with the following Prompts.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


5 SUB PRO ♦

WORK No. (SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER)


Enter the work-piece number of the sub-program (1-99999999) to be called from this
program.

REPEAT (REPEAT TIMES OF SUB-PROGRAM)


Enter the number of times of repetition required of the specified sub-program.
If no value has been entered then the machine will only perform the execution of the
Sub- program ONCE.

3-50
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Once information has been set into the unit where required, on the pressing of the INPUT
Key after the question REPEAT a Sequence Line will be generated. This Sequence line
enables you to state USER MACRO ARGUMENT Data. It is possible To enter Arguments
against addresses on the sequence line.

Sno. ARGM1 ARGM2 ARGM3 ARGM4 ARGM5 ARGM6


1

It is possible to enter up to 6 arguments per line, a maximum of 10 sequence lines can be


theoretically used. Argument addresses are selected from the ALPHA Keypad, all letters of
the alphabet are Valid as Macro Addresses (EXCEPT O,N,G,P and L). The address is
followed by numerical data representing the Variable.

Argument usage can only be considered when the Sub-program is an EIA/ISO user Macro
Program and data written within the Sub-program contains macro type information.
i.e. the usage of variables, (#), are relevant. It is not possible to use arguments when
branching to a Mazatrol program.

If no arguments are stated then the sequence line is not necessary, so after the unit header
Line has been completed then SEQUENCE END can be selected from the Menu bar.

3-51
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

THE END UNIT


The END unit is used to indicate the end of a sub-program. No further units can be entered
into the program after this statement.

UNo. CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


5 1 0 ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

CONTI. (CONTINUE Y:1, N:0)


Entering a value of zero (0), would mean that at the end of the cycle, the internal program
pointer would automatically return to the beginning of the program, and processing would
stop. This would mean if used at the end of a sub-program the cursor would not
automatically return to the main program once processing of the sub-program was
completed.
Entering a value of one (1), at the end of the program will result in the internal program
pointer returning to the main or calling program and the cycle will continue.

NUMBER (PARTS COUNTER Y:1, N:0 )


Entering a value of zero (0) means that at the end of the cycle, an update of the PARTS
COUNTER which can be found on the POSITION or COMMAND display will NOT be
made.
Entering a one (1) will result in parts counter registering a count each time the program cycle
completes. The processing of the program can be commanded to repeat a number of times by
entering a value into parts count target area. PC NO. (TARGET).

ATC, X, Y, Z, 4, ANGLE
Data entry in any of these columns is not applicable if, 1(YES) has been entered to the
(CONTI.) question.

3-52
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.10


USING SUB-PROGRAM

3-53
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-54
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-55
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 110-PROGRAM LISTING

SUB-PROGRAM FOR SLOT

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 COPPER 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. -65.
2 LINE 0. -35.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

3-56
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 10-PROGRAM LISTING

MAIN PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 COPPER 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 1. * 5 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 125. A ? ? XUN * 1. 87.5 330 1.321 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -100. -100. 100. 100.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


3 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


4 OFFSET 0 0 45. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


5 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


6 OFFSET 0 0 90. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


7 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


8 OFFSET 0 0 135. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


9 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


10 OFFSET 0 0 180. 0

3-57
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


11 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


12 OFFSET 0 0 225. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


13 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


14 OFFSET 0 0 270. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


15 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


16 OFFSET 0 0 315. 0

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


17 SUB PRO 110 *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


18 OFFSET 0 0 0. 0

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


19 DRILLING 15. 21. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 65 0.09 8
2 DRILL 15. 15. 21. 0. 100 DRILT 7.5 65 0.196 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR 0. -87.5 -87.5 0. 90. 175. 175. 0 2 2 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


21 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-58
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.11

3-59
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-60
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-61
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 111-PROGRAM LISTING

SUB-PROGRAM FOR SLOT

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 SLOT 6.35 6.35 12. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 10. A ? ? CW G01 5.75 * 16 0.122 8
F 2 E-MILL 10. B ? ? CW G01 * * 76 0.208 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 22.5 38.97
2 CCW -22.5 38.97 45.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


2 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

3-62
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 11-PROGRAM LISTING

MAIN PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 2. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 63. ? ? XBI-S * 1.4 44.1 128 1.2 8
F 2 F-MILL 125. A ? ? XUN * * 87.5 143 0.84 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 CIR 0. 0. 75. * * * * *

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


3 OFFSET 0. 0. 45. 0.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


4 SUB PRO 111 * 1

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


5 OFFSET 0. 0. 145. 0.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


6 SUB PRO 111 * 1

UNo. UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(ANGLE) W(Z)


7 OFFSET 0. 0. 0. 0.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF
8 POCKET 8. 8. * 5 5 0.42 0.42 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 10. A ? ? CW G01 7.58 7. 16 0.122 8
F 2 E-MILL 10. B ? ? CW G01 * 7. 76 0.16 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 20. 0.
2 LINE 20. 25.
3 CW ? ? 15. 35. 25. DOWN
4 CW ? ? 40. 20. 0. UP
5 CW 20. -25. 15. 35. -25.
6 LINE 20. 0.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


11 END 0 1 0 * * *

3-63
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-64
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PALLET CHANGE UNIT

3-65
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-66
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PALLET CHANGE UNIT

This unit is used to specify a pallet change operation.

The procedure for calling up a pallet change is as follows:

With the cursor currently located at the head of a new unit whilst in full program
edit mode, press the menu key OTHER.

Pressing the menu key OTHER will then display miscellaneous menus that are
used for special needs other than machining.

Once selected, the PALLET CHANGE unit will then be displayed with the
following prompts:

[PALLET No.] PALLET No.?


This represents the number of the pallet to be loaded onto the machine table.

[PALLET No.] NEXT PALLET No.?


This represents the number of the pallet to be selected next. On machines with
more than 2 pallets this will cause the pallet conveyor to rotate, bringing the
selected pallet to the pallet change ready position.

3-67
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The pallet number presently located within the machine is displayed on the
POSITION and COMMAND display.

In order to change the pallet on a horizontal machine equipped with an index


table, the table must be returned to the zero degree position. Therefore prior to
entering the pallet change unit, the INDEX unit must be selected to specify an
angle of zero degrees.
E.G.:
UNo.UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
5 INDEX 0. 0. NEAR

UNo.UNIT PALLET No.


6 PALL CHG 2 ( 5)

3-68
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

INDEXING UNIT

3-69
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-70
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

INDEXING UNIT

This unit is used to specify the angle of the surface that is required to be
machined, on machines equipped with an indexing table or a N.C. rotary table,
(4th axis). When the same tool, (and priority), is to be used on each surface, use
this unit for specifying the angular position of each surface.

The procedure for calling up an index command is as follows:

With the cursor currently located at the head of a new unit whilst in full program
edit mode, press the menu key OTHER.

Pressing the menu key OTHER will then display miscellaneous menus that are
used for special needs other than machining.

Once selected, the INDEX unit will then be displayed with the following prompts:

[TURN POS X] TABLE INDEX POSITION-X?


This represents the X coordinate within the MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM where it is required to perform the indexing of the table.
If no data is entered, then indexing will be performed at the current X-axis
position.

3-71
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[TURN POS Y] TABLE INDEX POSITION-Y?


This represents the Y coordinate within the MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM where it is required to perform the indexing of the table.
If no data is entered, then indexing will be performed at the current Y-axis
position.

[TURN POS Z] TABLE INDEX POSITION-Z?


This represents the Z coordinate within the MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM where it is required to perform the indexing of the table.
If no data is entered, then indexing will be performed at the current Z-axis position
- the Initial point.

[ANGLE] ANGLE OF TABLE?


This is the angular position to which the machine table indexes after first moving
to the X, Y & Z positions as entered in the previous columns.
NB. Looking towards the index table face, the index angle increases from zero
degrees in a CW direction.

[TURN DIR.] TABLE INDEX DIRECTION <MENU>?


This is the direction in which the machine table indexes to the angular position
previously designated. Menu choices are:
SHORTEST (AUTO) Index by the shortest route to the designated angle.
CW Index in a clockwise direction to the designated angle.
CCW Index in a counterclockwise direction to the designated angle.
If no data is set into this column, an alarm will be displayed.

3-72
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROCESS CONTROL

3-73
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROCESS CONTROL
When priority numbers are used in a relatively long program, and/or programs are
linked together, using Sub Programming, it can be very confusing for someone
trying to study the Program display to read the actual machining sequence, (where
priorities may appear to be randomly allocated.

To simplify the machining sequence display, the structure of the programs can be
viewed on an alternative screen.
Pressing the Display Select (F1) key followed by pressing the Program key, the
PROCESS CONTROL and PROGRAM LAYOUT menu options (amongst
others) will be displayed as shown below.

By pressing the PROCESS CONTROL menu selection key, the Process Control
screen will be displayed.
On this screen the control will display the relationship between of the currently
selected program to any sub program(s) called from this (main) program including
the sub programming level.
Also shown will be the different processes into which the programs are divided by
the Process End and Pallet Change units.
Within this screen display, the cursor keys can be used to move the cursor from
one line to another. The page keys will move the cursor from one process to
another. The PROCESS No. SEARCH menu enables the control to search for
the entered process number.

3-74
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Display Screen of Process Control

3-75
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-76
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MANUAL PROGRAM

3-77
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-78
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MANUAL PROGRAM

The Manual Program unit within the Mazatrol system allows the programmer to
use a simplified G code program structure, very similar to EIA/ISO format
programming.

Unlike the rest of Mazatrol programming, were the programmer programs the part
shape, with Manual programming, the tool path is programmed. This allows the
programming of parts that could not be described using one of the usual Mazatrol
units, or simply allows the programmer to program the tool path, if it is more
convenient.

The Mazatrol Manual unit is structured differently to the other Mazatrol cutting
cycles. Whereas the units are constructed in 3 parts, (Unit heading, Sequence data
and Figure data), The Manual unit is only constructed with 2 parts, (Unit heading
and sequence data).

To select Manual program, press the menu key.

The Unit heading deals mainly with tool information. The control will not default
any tool information for a Manual unit, as the it does not know what the unit is to
be used for.

Select the menu >>> for point machining tools.

3-79
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Data setting in manual program mode unit


UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-φ No.

MANU PRO

Cursor position Description


Select menu key corresponding to the tool used. Pressing the menu key >>> changes the menu a b a
in this order.
ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH
>>>
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR
a
TOOL
CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP
>>>
DRILL FACER BAR BOR.BAR VACUUM
b

Note: The tool number will be 0 if no tool selection is made.


Enter the nominal diameter of the tool by means of numeric keys. Input range (0.1 to 999.9)
- In the case of the identical designation and length but of different materials, it is necessary
to differentiate them by identification code.
The identification code is selected from the menu:

NOM-φ A B C D E F G H HEAVY
>>>
TOOL

- In order to designate the heavy tool, select the desired menu item after having displayed
the menu for heavy tool identification code by pressing the menu key HEAVY TOOL.
Note: When one of the menu keys END MILL, FACE MILL, CHAMFER CUTTER and BALL ENDMILL
is selected in the article TOOL, the alarm 434 NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE is displayed if
the selected tool has not been previously recorded in the TOOL FILE display.
Determine the priority machining number (prior machining, subsequent machining).
The input of data is done in accordance with the following 3 methods;
- Priority No. for prior machining:
Enter the number by means of numeric keys.
Input range (0 to 99)
- Priority No. for subsequent machining:
Press the menu key DELAY PRIORITY, then enter the number by means of numeric keys.
No.
Input range (0 to 99)
MACHINING PRIORITY No.? ( )

DELAY PRI. No. PRI. No. PRI. No. SUB PROG


PRIORITY CHANGE ASSIGN ALL ERAS PROC END

- Without input: Normal machining. The machining order is not specified.

3-80
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Sequence Data

The Sequence data area in a Manual unit is constructed using lines of information
in the same way as an EIA/ISO program. One Manual program line would equal
one EIA/ISO block.
Each line can contain; G codes, Data, S command and M/B codes.
An explanation of each is as follows.

G codes

A maximum of two G codes can be entered per line. An explanation of the


individual G code usage follows after the general explanation of the other
addresses available.

Data

The following Word Addresses selected from the Menu can be entered in any of
the six DATA columns: X, Y, Z, 4,F, R, I, J, K, P & D.
Note 1. It is possible to use any legal address selected from the Alpha
keypad.
Note 2. All words are modal unless specified otherwise.

X, Y & Z
Data entered against these addresses are the commanded end point coordinates (of
the main linear axes) for the current line. The unit of input can be either mm or
inch.

4
This is the address for the optional fourth axis (NC rotary table), and the data
entered is the commanded end point coordinate for the current line. The unit of
input is degrees.

F
Data entered against this address sets the axis feed rate, and is effective for any
G01, G02 and G03 interpolation commands. The feed rate units of input can either
be feed/min or feed/rev depending on the currently active G code, - G94 or G95
respectively.

R
Data entered against this address is the arc radius value for circular arcs as
established in G02 and G03 interpolation lines.
The unit of input can be either mm or inch. (This code is non modal).

3-81
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

I, J & K
These are the addresses for the centre point coordinates, of a circular arc, for the
X, Y & Z axes respectively. Data entered against these addresses set the
incremental distance and direction from the start point to the centre point of the
arc. The unit of input can be either mm or inch.

P
Used with Helical interpolation programming, the P value sets the number of
’turns’ to make. The P data is an integer value (not fractional). (This code is non
modal).

S
Data entered against this address sets the RPM of the spindle.

M/B
If the menu, B CODE INPUT, has not been selected, then the entered data will
be entered as an M code, (miscellaneous function). Only one M/B code can be
entered per line.
Generally, M code data is processed at the beginning of the processing of the data
entered in that line, except for codes like M00 and M01.

If the menu, B CODE INPUT, has been selected, then the entered data will be
entered as a B axis command. This B axis command is only applicable to a
Horizontal machining centre with an index table. The value of the entered data, is
the commanded absolute index position required (as dimensioned from the zero
degree index position). The unit of input is degrees.
NB. The B code input method of table index is an alternative method to the more
popular INDEX unit.

3-82
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G CODES
(MAZATROL MANUAL PROGRAMMING)

G CODE GROUP FUNCTION


G00* POSITIONING (RAPID TRAVERSE)

A
G01 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (FEED)
G02 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION CW
G03 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION CCW
G04 B DWELL
Non Modal
G17* XY PLANE SELECTION
C
G18 ZX PLANE SELECTION
G19 YZ PLANE SELECTION
G28 D RETURN TO 1ST REFERENCE POINT
Non Modal
G30 E RETURN TO 2ND REFERENCE POINT
Non Modal
G40* CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION CANCEL
F
G41 CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION LEFT
G42 CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION RIGHT
G90* G ABSOLUTE COORDINATE PROGRAMMING
G91 INCREMENTAL COORDINATE
PROGRAMMING
G94 H FEED RATE/MIN, SECONDS DWELL
G95* FEED RATE/REV, REVOLUTIONS DWELL

* = STATUS AT POWER ON, OR, COMMENCEMENT OF


MANUAL PROGRAM UNIT PROCESSING

3-83
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G CODES - REF. G CODE TABLE.

G codes are separated into different groups.

Codes from groups B, D & E are non-modal, - i.e. only active for the one line in
which they are programmed.

Codes from the other groups, A, C, F, G & H are modal, - i.e. once programmed
in a line, the code remains active for subsequent lines until another G code from
its own group is programmed to replace it.
Since there are five modal G code groups, there are, therefore, five G codes, (one
from each group), active at any one time.
The initial modal G code status set by the control at the start of processing a
Manual Program unit is as follows: -
G00, G17, G40, G90 & G95

G00
This code causes the machine axis (axes) to move to the commanded end point at
rapid traverse rate.
If two or more axes are commanded together, the path will be a linear
interpolation, - i.e. shortest tool path to the commanded end point.

FINISH POINT

START POINT
START POINT FINISH POINT

X axis movement at 30 m/min X&Z axis movement at 30 m/min

3-84
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G01
This code causes the machine axis (axes) to move to the commanded end point at
a feed rate in linear interpolation. The feed rate being programmed by the F
code.

FINISH POINT

START POINT
START POINT FINISH POINT

Feedrate in X axis Feedrate in X& Z axis

G02
This code causes the machine to move in two axes simultaneously at feed rate in a
clockwise direction circular interpolation path to the commanded end point. The
feed rate being programmed by the F code. See relevant associated drawing on the
following page.
Rules
(i) The required tool path must be viewed in the negative direction of the
stationary, (third), axis. If the tool path is seen as clockwise, then G02 is the
correct code to program. (This same tool path, if incorrectly viewed in the positive
direction of the third axis, would appear to be counterclockwise, creating
confusion with the correctly programmed G02 - clockwise interpolation code).

(ii) The plane of interpolation is dependant on the currently active code from
group C, - G17, G18 or G19.

(iii) The arc radius, (R address), is entered as a positive value for arc spans less
than, or equal to 180 degrees.
The arc radius is entered as a negative value for arc spans greater than 180
degrees but less than 360 degrees.

(iv) I, J & K values can be programmed, (instead of R), as the centre point
coordinates for the X, Y & Z axes respectively.
The data entered with the appropriate address, being; the incremental
distance and direction from the start point to the centre point of the arc,
(As Fanuc systems).

3-85
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G03
This code causes the machine to move in two axes simultaneously at feed rate in a
counterclockwise direction circular interpolation path to the commanded end
point. The feed rate being programmed by the F code.
See G02 for the rules.

G02 CW G03 CCW


ARC ARC

G04
This code is used to cause the machine to dwell at its current position for a set
time. The value of the X word following the G04 command (in the same block),
sets the dwell time in seconds when using G94 (feed/min) or revs when using G95
(feed/rev)
E.g. G94 G04 X5. Sets a dwell for five seconds.
G95 G04 X5. Sets a dwell for five revolutions.

G17
This sets the X/Y plane as the selected interpolation plane. That is, circular
interpolation (G02, G03), and cutter radius compensation (G41, G42), become
effective in the X/Y plane when preceded by the G17 code.
To determine the true arc direction, (clockwise or counterclockwise for circular
interpolation), and true offset direction, (left or right for cutter radius
compensation), the required tool path must be viewed in the negative direction of
the stationary, (third), axis. - In this case, the Z axis
If X, Y & Z end point coordinates are programmed in a circular interpolation
block, then if G17 is the active code, the machine/tool will feed in a circular path
in the X & Y axes, and feed linearly in the Z axis - Helical Interpolation.
See the drawing on the following page.

3-86
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Y X Z

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

X Z Y

G17 (X-Y)PLANE G18 (X-Z)PLANE G19 (Y-Z)PLANE

G18 and G19.

The rules for G18 and G19 are the same as those for G17. That is, circular
interpolation (G02, G03), and cutter radius compensation (G41, G42), become
effective in the X/Z plane when preceded by the G18 code, and the Y/Z plane
when preceded by the G19 code.
To determine the true arc direction, (clockwise or counterclockwise for circular
interpolation), and true offset direction, (left or right for cutter radius
compensation), the required tool path must be viewed in the negative direction of
the stationary, (third), axis.

3-87
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G28
Programming this command will cause the machine to return to its first home
position at rapid traverse rate, but only in the axes specified in the current block.
The coordinate values of the axes programmed in the G28 block set the
intermediate point through which the machine returns to the home position.

NB. Home position, Zero return position & Reference return position are
alternative definitions for the Machine zero point.

G30
Programming this command will cause the machine to return to its second home
position at rapid traverse rate, but only in the axes specified in the current block.
The coordinate values of the axes programmed in the G30 block set the
intermediate point through which the machine returns to the home position.
The second home position is dimensioned from the first home position. The
dimensional data being set in machine parameters.
NB. The second home point normally establishes the tool change or pallet
change position and is not usually programmed in Manual Programming.

3-88
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G40
This code will cancel any cutter radius compensation previously established with
G41 or G42

G41
This code will offset the centre of the tool to the left-hand side of the defined tool
path by an amount equal to the cutter radius, (half of the Actual Diameter set on
the Tool Data page).

G42
This code will offset the centre of the tool to the right hand side of the defined
tool path by an amount equal to the cutter radius, (half of the Actual Diameter set
on the Tool Data page).

Rules
(I) The codes G40, G41 & G42 should only be programmed in the same block as
a linear command - G00 or G01
(ii) Compensation should be cancelled or activated (using G40, G41 & G42) in a
block with a programmed move, - where the commanded move is equal to or
greater than the cutter radius.
(iii) Once cutter radius compensation has been activated with G41 or G42, the
code should not normally be restated. G40 should be the next code subsequently
programmed from this group, -to cancel cutter radius compensation.
(iv) The required tool offset must be viewed in the negative direction of the
stationary, (third), axis and looking in the direction of the required tool travel. If
the tool centre is seen as being offset to the left of the programmed coordinates,
then G41 is the correct code to program. (This same tool offset, if incorrectly
viewed in the positive direction of the third axis, or incorrectly viewed against the
direction of the required tool travel, would appear to be an offset to the right of the
defined coordinates, creating confusion with the correctly programmed G41 offset
code).
The same considerations must be made for determining the G42 programming
requirement.
(v) The plane in which the tool is offset is dependant on the currently active code
from group C, - G17, G18 or G19.

3-89
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G41 G42

CUTTING CUTTING
TOOL TOOL

TIP: Always look in the required tool path direction, G41 the tool should always
be on the left-hand side of the part profile, G42 the tool should always be on the
right hand side of the part profile.

G90
Any X, Y, Z or 4th axis commands entered following the G90 code will be
understood by the control as absolute coordinates.
That is, the coordinate positions programmed will be dimensioned from the
"Absolute program zero point".

Y+

X0.

X300.
X200.
X100.

X+

3-90
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

G91
Any X, Y, Z or 4th axis commands entered following the G91 code will be
understood by the control as incremental coordinates. That is, the coordinate
positions programmed will be incremental movements from the machines/tools
current position.

Y+

X-300.

X100.
X100.
X100.

G94
Feed rates, (entered using the F code), programmed following the G94 code will
be understood by the control as feed/minute. (Also know as non-synchronous
feed).
Also, with respect to the G04 dwell, (- the dwell time data being entered using the
X address), the data will be in seconds.

G95
Feed rates, (entered using the F code), programmed following the G95 code will
be understood by the control as feed/revolution. (Also know as synchronous
feed).
Also, with respect to the G04 dwell, (- the dwell time data being entered using the
X address), the data will be in revolutions.

NOTE - G CODE USAGE


It is possible to use G codes other than those listed in the table, provided that they
are legal codes and understood by the Mazatrol control, and, that all the associated
words can be entered within the six DATA columns of the relevant block.

3-91
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-92
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

‘M’ CODES

3-93
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-94
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

LIST OF M CODES
The following list shows the general M codes used in the machining centers. It must be noted
however, that certain codes can not be used in certain machines and that other codes can be
ordered. For details, refer to the Operating Manual for the machine.

M code Function
0 Programmed stop
1 Optional stop
2 End of program (EIA/ISO)
3 Rotation of spindle (to the right)
4 Rotation of spindle (to the left)
5 Stop of the spindle
6 Changing of tool (EIA/ISO)
7 Mist spray during operation
8 Liquid spray during operation
9 Stop of all spray and compressed air
10 Clamping of tool in the spindle
11 Unclamping of tool in the spindle

15 Magazine cover closed


16 Magazine cover open

19 Orientation of spindle

23 Error detection valid


24 Error detection invalid

30 End of program and rewinding of strip (EIA/ISO)

33 Tool length measurement unit feed


34 Tool length measurement unit withdrawal
35 Detection of tool rupture
36 Selection of spindle speed range (Low)
37 Selection of spindle speed range (Low/Medium low)
38 Selection of spindle speed range (Low/Medium/Medium high)
39 Selection of spindle speed range (High)
40 Selection of spindle speed range (Neutral)

42 Inverted rotation of indexing table


43 External command of M code 3
44 External command of M code 4

3-95
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

M code Function
45 External command of M code 5

48 Spindle speed correction Valid


49 Spindle speed correction Invalid
50 Air blast in operation
51 Spraying crossing the spindle in operation
52 Spraying for tapping in operation

58 Check of tool life

64 Closing of pallet door


65 Opening of pallet door

68 Clamping of pallet
69 Unclamping of pallet
70 Pallet unload
71 Selection of pallet No. 1
72 Selection of pallet No. 2
73 Selection of pallet No. 3
74 Selection of pallet No. 4
75 Selection of pallet No. 5
76 Selection of pallet No. 6

90 Cancellation of symmetrical image (MAZATROL)


91 Symmetrical image WPC-X Valid (MAZATROL)
92 Symmetrical image WPC-Y Valid (MAZATROL)
93 Symmetrical image WPC-4 Valid (MAZATROL)

98 Call-up of subprogram (EIA/ISO)


99 End of subprogram (EIA/ISO)
100 External command of M code 1
101 External command of M code 2

122 Play take-up device Valid


123 Play take-up device Invalid

130 Niagara spraying in operation

132 Compressed air crossing the spindle in operation


EIA/ISO: valid in EIA/ISO program
MAZATROL: valid in MAZATROL program

3-96
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.13

3-97
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-98
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-99
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 13-PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 15. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 2. * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 80. ? ? XBI-S * 2. 56. 158 1.08 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 150. 125.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


3 DRILLING 15. 15. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 15. 15. * * * 90° * 25 0.09 8
2 DRILL 15. 15. 15. 0. 100 DRILT 7.5 25 0.196 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 25. 25. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


4 MANU PRO DRILL 16. A
SNo.G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 X 25. Y 25. Z 20. 600 M3
2 Z 3. M8
3 1 Z -14.5 F 0.5
4 Z -20. F 0.1
5 94 91X 100. Y 75. Z 10. F 120
6 4 X 0.5
7 0 90 Z 20.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


6 END 0 1 0 * * *

3-100
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.14

3-101
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-102
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-103
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 14-PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 15. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


2 MANU PRO E-MILL 20. A
SNo.G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 X -25. Y -25. Y 25. 390 M3
2 Z -12. M8
3
4 1 41X 0. Y -5. F 0.3
5 Y 200.
6 X 100.
7 Y 150.
8 3 X 150. Y 100. R 50.
9 1 X 200.
10 Y 0.
11 X -5.
12 0 40X -25. Y -25. M9
13 Z 25.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


6 END 0 1 0 * * *

3-104
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.15

3-105
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-106
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-107
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

HELICAL INTERPOLATION

If two axis, (selected from X,Y & Z), are commanded in a G02 or G03 block, the
resultant path is a circular interpolation in the selected planes. Now if the other axis is
Added to this circular movement the resultant path is a combination of circular
interpolation and linear movement of the other axis. This is known as HELICAL
INTERPOLATION.
One common application of Helical Interpolation on a Machining Centre is to
THREAD MILL a bore, where tapping is impractical. It also may be used to produce a
male thread on a boss where the use of a Die Box is undesirable. The following is a
program listing and explanation including the calculations required, In order to generate
a correct tool path.

EXAMPLE 15-PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

THREAD MILL UNIT


UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.
2 MANU PRO E-MILL 29. B
SNo.G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 90X 0. Y 0. Z 10. 1200 M3
2 Z -25. M8
3 41 X 20. Y 5.
4 3 X 0. Y 25. Z -24.6 R 20. F 0.2
5 X -25. Y 0. Z -22.1 J -25. P 1.
6 X -5. Y -20. Z -21.7 R 20.
7 0 40X 0. Y 0.
8 Z 10.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-108
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SEQ. LINE No1.


1. G0 G90 X0. Y0. Z10. S1200 M3

The tool rapids to bore centre, (X0,Y0), and 10mm above Z


zero, the three axis move simultaneously to position.
Absolute programming is commanded (G90). Spindle start in a
clockwise direction at 1200RPM.

SEQ. LINE No2.


2. Z-25. M8

Rapid in z-axis to 25mm below Z0. To ensure that the bottom


of the tool is below the bottom of the plate.
Flood coolant turns on at the start of the axis movement.

SEQ. LINE No3.


3. G41 X 20. Y5.

Apply cutter radius compensation offset to the left-hand side of


the 90-degree approach arc, (X20. Y5.), by the cutter radius
amount, at rapid traverse rate.

Approach/Escape radius calculation.

Thread Mill diameter =29mm

Approach diameter = Threaded bore dia. + thread mill dia. = 50 + 29 = 39.5


2. 2.

Approach radius = 39.5 = 19.75 = 20. Rounded for simplicity


2

3-109
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SEQ. LINE No4


4. G3 X 0. Y25. Z-24.6 R20. F0.2

Circular interpolate, CCW around the inside of the 20mm radius


approach arc at 0.2mm feed rate to the top of the threaded bore,
(X0,Y25.), feeding simultaneously into cut in Z-axis by 0.4mm,
to Z-24.6 in a linear move (see explanation next).

Z-axis movement distance during approach/escape helical block.

The thread mill will initially be moved to a point at one end of the approach arc, and
then feed through 90 degrees around the inside of the approach arc to the threaded
bore surface. During this movement the tool should ideally feed in a linear movement
in the Z-axis to avoid possible thread thinning as the tool approaches into the material
of the threaded bore in the X/Y plane.

Now, if the tool were initially at a quadrant position, on the inside of the threaded bore
surface, and were then in feed to interpolate through 90 degrees to the next quadrant
position (1/4 of a turn). As this occurred the tool would need to make a linear
movement in Z-axis equal to a quarter of the pitch of the thread.

However the tool does not travel through a full ninety-degree arc as its path follows the
inside of the approach arc and not the threaded bore. The distance travelled by the
cutter in the X/Y plane is therefore less than the full quadrant and hence the movement
of the Z-axis is reduced proportionally. (A ratio of the radius)

The Ratio calculation would appear as:

Approach arc Z movement = Approach radius


Threaded bore z movement Threaded bore radius

Therefore :

Approach arc Z movement = 20mm (approach rad.)


Pitch /4 (1/4 of a turn) 25mm (threaded bore rad.)

Approach arc Z movement = 20 x 2 = 0.4mm Travel


25 4

3-110
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SEQ. LINE No5.


5. X -25. Y0. Z-22.1 J-25. P1.

Circular interpolate CCW around the inside of the threaded bore


for one and a quarter turns to X-25.0,Y0., feeding simultaneously
up in Z-axis in a linear movement by 2.5mm,(one and a quarter
thread pitches), to Z-22.1.

I or J values need to be set to reflect centre point co-ordinates


used, as the arc span exceeds 360 degrees.

The P value is stated to specify the number of complete turns required. This is not
necessary if the number of turns is less than one.
Note: the value of P is disregarded by the control if the R address is entered in the
helical interpolation block.

SEQ. LINE No6.


6. X -5. Y-20. Z-21.7 R20.

Circular interpolate CCW around the inside of the 20mm radius


to the end of the escape arc (X-5. , Y20. ). Simultaneously
feeding up in Z in a linear movement by 0.4mm to Z-21.7 as
calculated.

SEQ. LINE No7.


7. G0 G40 X0. Y0.

Rapid traverse to the centre of the threaded bore (X0, Y0.),


cancelling cutter radius compensation, (G40), during the
movement.

3-111
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

SEQ. LINE No8.


8. Z10.

Rapid in Z to a clearance position 10mm above the job.

3-112
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.16

3-113
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-114
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-115
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 16-PROGRAM LISTING

SUB-PROGRAM FOR COMPONENT –WRK. No. 17

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 1. * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 80. ? ? XBI-S * 1. 44.1 165 1.08
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 50. 50. 200. 160.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


3 STEP 6. 6. * 3 3 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 25. A ? ? CW G01 3. 5.6 14 0.061
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 50. 50. 200. 160.
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 LINE 65. 70.
3 LINE 65. 150.
4 LINE 125. 150.
5 LINE 125. 95. R 25.
6 LINE 180. 95.
7 LINE 180. 70.
8 LINE 65. 70.

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-ø PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


4 TAPPING M12. 12. 1.75 17. 1. 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 12.39 * * * 90° * 25 0.09
2 DRILL 10.4 10.4 23.25 0. 100 DRILT 5.2 25 0.161
3 TAP M12. 12. 17. * * FIX P1.75 9 1.75
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 75. 80. * * * * * * * 0 0 1
2 PT 0. 115. 140. * * * * * * * 0 0 1

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


6 END 1 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-116
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 16 –PROGRAM LISTING

MAIN PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT No. M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8


2 M CODE 90

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


3 SUB PRO 17 * 1

UNo. UNIT No. M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8


4 M CODE 91

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


5 SUB PRO 17 * 1

UNo. UNIT No. M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8


6 M CODE 92

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


7 SUB PRO 17 * 1

UNo. UNIT No. M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8


8 M CODE 90 92

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


9 SUB PRO 17 * 1

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


10 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

3-117
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3-118
640M PROGRAMMING COURSE CONTENTS

DAY 4

4. WPC θ........................................................................... 4-1


Multi-Offsets................................................................. 4-5
Program Example No.21............................................... 4-9
Offset Type Example .................................................... 4-17
Tool Data ...................................................................... 4-23
Tool Layout................................................................... 4-47
Miscellaneous Functions............................................... 4-59
Line Vector Example .................................................... 4-67
MMS Unit ..................................................................... 4-75
MMS Example .............................................................. 4-103
4th Axis Programming ................................................... 4-107
Program Example No.26............................................... 4-117
Program Example No.27............................................... 4-123
Program Example No.29............................................... 4-129
Program Example No.30............................................... 4-133
Program Example No.36............................................... 4-141
Data I/O......................................................................... 4-145

C-4
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

WPC u (ANGLE)

4-1
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-2
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

WPC u (ANGLE)
Normally, Mazatrol programmes are written assuming that the components datum
edge is set parallel to the X-axis.
If this is not found to be the case during the set up of the component, then there
are two main alternatives to remedy the problem:
1) Reset the component/fixture so that the components datum edge is set parallel
to the X-axis.
2) Enter the amount of angular error, (between the datum edge and the X-axis),
into the column of the WPC. - A CCW angular error being entered as a positive
value, and a CW angular error being entered as a negative value.
If the angular error has to be accurately entered, and the option of the MMS,
(Mazak Measuring System), has not been supplied, then the better alternative
would be to reset the component/fixture.

Y+ Y+

43.25º X+

X+
-43.25º

WPC  º WPC  º

If a component has been programmed with its longer edge set parallel to the Y
axis, then depending on the component length and Y axis stroke, there could be a
possibility that there is not enough Y axis travel on the machine.
Rather than re-programming the component with its shorter edge set parallel to the
Y-axis, a more simplified solution would be to enter a value of 90°LQWKH:3&
column. This would enable the component to be physically set at 90° to its
programmed position, and would rotate the tool path through 90° about the X/Y
zero point, from its programmed position.

4-3
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

7KH:3& GUDZLQJVKRZVZKHUHD°:3& VHWWLQJKDVEHHQXVHG

M/C ZERO
W.P.C. 0 =0 POST’N

W.P.C. 0 =-90.

ACTUAL SET UP POSITION

PROGRAMMED POSITION

4-4
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MULTI-MODE OFFSETS

4-5
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-6
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MULTI –MODE OFFSETS


When entering data into the Common unit of at the start of the program (Uno.0) you are
offered MULTI MODE, this gives you the facility to offset the program a number of times.
The possible options at this stage are seen below:

1. MULTI OFF (MULTI MODE OFF): Ordinary machining (single work-piece)

2. MULTI 5 x 2 Allows the Machining of up to 10 work-pieces set in a uniform pattern.


This pattern can be of up to 5 components in the X-Axis and 2 in the Y-Axis
generating a 5x2 pattern. If MULTI 5 X 2 is selected you are required to
answer the following:
MULTI WORKPIECE Y:1 N:0. Informing the control as to which of the
10 position are used. If all positions are required then ten ones should be
entered at this stage. The first 1 entered relates to position 10. If certain
locations are NOT required then individual positions can be switched off by
entering a zero at the appropriate point.( Eg. 1111011111 will switch off
position six.)
PITCH-X and PITCH-Y is necessary to enter the pitch between the
components in the pattern, in X this is the distance from a datum point on the
1st component to a similar point on the next in the row. The pitch in Y is the
same and is the distance between the two rows in the pattern

10 9 8 7 6

PITCH-Y
1 2 3 4 5

PITCH-X
(TYPICAL)

4-7
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-8
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 21
MULTI MODE 5 X 2

4-9
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-10
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

24
30

14
2X 8.00 DIA.
40
HOLES

This component is to be produced on a fixture twenty per load in the pattern seen below.
The pitch of the components is typical in both X & Y axis. We will produce the parts using
Program No.21 (Main program) and program No.101 (Sub program)
TYPICAL
Y500.

TYPICAL
Y250.

X200.
TYPICAL

4-11
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 21 PROGRAM LISTING

MAIN PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 1 5 * 2 0000100001 0. 500.

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


2 SUB PRO 101 * 1

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 0 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-12
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 101 PROGRAM LISTING

SUB-PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 1 5 * 2 1111111111 200. 250.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 TOP EMIL 0. 3. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 20. ? ? XBI G01 2.4 5.6 14 0.061 8
F 2 E-MILL 20. A ? ? XUN G01 * 14. 15 0.416 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 30. 40. 0.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP


2 REAMING 8. 12. 0.5 DRILL 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 9. * * * 90° * 25 0.09 8
2 DRILL 7.8 7.8 13. 0. 100 DRILT 3.9 25 0.127 8
3 REAM 8. 8. 12. * * * G01 16 0.174 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 LIN 0. 8. 22. -30.256 * 27.785 * 0 2 * * 0 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R RGH CHMF


3 CHMF OUT 0. 10. 30. * 0.5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
1 CHF-C 16. ? ? CW G01 * * 75 0.2 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 40. 30.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


4 END 1 1 * * * * * * *

4-13
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-14
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3. OFFSET TYPE:
This facility allows the machining of up to ten components in a program,
where the parts are set in a random pattern about the table of the machine
an offset can be set individually for each component. The offsets are set
in the program as seen below, this can be done in X,Y,Z axis and an angular
position can also be stated.

NOTE: Although only ten offsets per program can be used, if more are
required then sub-programs up to a level of nine (maximum) can be used
increasing the number to 10,000,000,000 offsets.
UNo. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y

0 S45C 50 0 OFFSET TYPE


OFS X Y th Z
1 X1 Y1 th1 Z1
2 X2 Y2 th2 Z2
3 X3 Y3 th3 Z3

Y direction X2 2

X3 3

1 Y2
X1
Y3
Y1

X direction
Workpiece zero point (WPC)

M3P079

y 3

2
Y3 x’
X2
y’
X3
Y2

Y1
X1

M3P080

4-15
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-16
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

OFFSET TYPE EXAMPLE

4-17
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-18
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-19
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-20
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 19-PROGRAM LISTING

USING OFFSET TYPE-MAIN PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 COPPER 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 1. * 5 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 125. A ? ? XUN * 1. 87.5 330 1.321 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -100. -100. 100. 100.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


3 SUB PRO 20 *

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


4 DRILLING 15. 21. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 65 0.09 8
2 DRILL 15. 15. 21. 0. 100 DRILT 7.5 65 0.196 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR 0. -87.5 -87.5 0. 90. 175. 175. 0 2 2 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


5 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-21
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 20 –PROGRAM LISTING

USING OFFSET TYPE-SUB PROGRAM


UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 COPPER 25. 0 OFFSET TYPE * * *

OFS X. Y. θ Z
1 0 0 0. 0
2 0 0 45. 0
3 0 0 90. 0
4 0 0 135. 0
5 0 0 180. 0
6 0 0 225. 0
7 0 0 270. 0
8 0 0 315. 0

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 SLOT 5. 5. 20. 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 16. A ? ? CW G01 4.4 * 38 0.207
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * * 140 0.208
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE 0. 65.
2 LINE 0. 35.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


2 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

4-22
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

TOOL DATA DISPLAY

4-23
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-24
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

TOOL DATA Display


Function:
- Registering magazine-mounted tools and setting tool shape data and the data required
for management of the tools
Remarks:
- Tool materials data that has been set on this display is used as learning data relating to
cutting conditions.
- Tools can also be registered on the TOOL LAYOUT display.
- Tool lengths can be manually measured using this display.

Data display

1. Outline

List of tool data. Information on the tool selected


from the list at left.

D735S1048E
A list of tool data is displayed at left, and detailed information on the tool selected from
the list will be displayed at right. Either of the two areas can be selected by using the Tab
key and the current selection is indicated by the reverse display of the title “TOOL

4-25
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
LIST” or “TNo. **: CONTENTS” in magenta.
The operation of the cursor keys and page keys differs as follows according to the
selected area:

Key TOOL LIST area CONTENTS area


Cursor keys Selection of a tool data line Selection of a data item
Page keys Selection of a page of list Selection of a tool data line on the list page

2. Displayed data

D735S1049E

3. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description


TNo. Pocket number
PKNo. Pocket number for random ATC
TOOL Tool name
NOM-φ mm (inch) Nominal diameter of the tool
ID CODE Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)
INTERFER. Intra-magazine interference data
ACT-φ mm (inch) Actual diameter of the tool
LENGTH mm (inch) Tool length
LENG COMP. mm (inch) Cutting-end position compensation value
AUXIL. Number of cutting edges (drill), corner R (end-mill) or tapping method (tap)
THRUST F. % Thrust force coefficient for Z-axis servomotor

4-26
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
No. Item Unit Data description
HORSE PW % Horsepower coefficient for spindle motor
MAX.ROT. min–1 (rpm) Max. spindle speed
MAT. Tool material
LIFE TIME Minutes Life time of the tool
CUT TIME Minutes Tool operation time
Group number of the tool (the same group number is assigned to all tools
GROUP No.
that are the same in both shape and dimensions.)
ID No. Tool ID number
DIAM.CORR. mm (inch) Amount of tool diameter geometric offset
No. Offset number for tool diameter
LENG.CORR. mm (inch) Amount of tool length geometric offset
No. Offset number for tool length
Status of the tool
DSBL: disabled (prohibition of use)
STATUS
BRK: broken
OVER: tool life over

Tool-data input procedures (for MAZATROL programs)


Usually, when executing a MAZATROL program, the TOOL LAYOUT display is to be
called up on the screen and then pocket numbers assigned to the tools to be used.
That is, the tools to be used are to be registered in order of pocket number. The TOOL
DATA display indicates the tools in that order.
Example: If the tools to be used have been registered on the TOOL LAYOUT display
as shown below:
TOOL LAYOUT display

The display on the TOOL DATA display will then be presented as shown below:

4-27
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The shape data necessary to perform actual machining and the data necessary for
management purposes must be input for each of the displayed tools. These data are:
ACT-φ, LENGTH, LENG COMP., AUXIL., THRUST F, HORSE PW, LIFE TIME, CUT
TIME , MAT. and MAX. ROT.
However, there are data that do not need to be input according to the type of tool. Such
data items will be displayed in gray (both title and data box) as shown above, and the
cursor will move through such an item to the next data item.
The following describes the data input procedures.
Example: Setting data for the TNo. 2 end-mill shown in the diagram above:
Assume that the TOOL DATA display containing the data shown above is
already presented on the display.
(1) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and press a cursor key to call up the cursor.
(2) Select TNo. 2.
(3) Press the Tab key to select the right column (CONTENTS).
(4) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the ACT-φ item.
(5) Specify the actual diameter of the tool using the appropriate numeric keys, and then
press the INPUT key.
Í The input value will then be displayed under ACT-φ and the cursor will move to
the LENGTH item.
Note: Under the ACT-φ item, the same value as that of the NOM-φ item will be
displayed as shown in the example given. If this value is not to be
changed, it is not necessary to execute Steps (4) and (5).
(6) Measure the actual length of the tool.
(7) Input the tool length data in the LENGTH item.

4-28
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

(8) Specify the cutting-end position compensation value (LENG COMP.) using the
appropriate numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.

Spindle
end face

LENGTH

LENG
COMP.

ACT-φ
Cutting-end position compensation value for drill M3S020

- Cutting-end position compensation is necessary for drills, back spot-facing tools,


back-boring bars, or other tools whose actual cutting-end positions are not at the
tips of the tools.
- In the example given above for an end-mill, skip the cursor to the next item by

pressing the key because cutting-end position compensation is not


necessary.
- The value 0 is preset to each of the LENG COMP., THRUST F., HORSE PW, LIFE
TIME, CUT TIME and MAX. ROT. items.
- For drills, setting in “LENGTH” sets the cutting-end position compensation value
automatically.
Automatic setting of the cutting-end position compensation value can be
deactivated using the following parameter:
Parameter L44: Automatic setting of the cutting-end position compensation value
(0: Valid, 1: Invalid)
- For drills, the appropriate cutting-end position compensation value can be set by
setting the nose angle for the tool after pressing the CUT-ANG INPUT menu key.
(9) Move the cursor to the AUXIL. item and set the number of cutting edges of the drill,
the value of corner R of the end-mill or the method of tapping for the tap.
- Specify the number of cutting edges of the drill using numeric keys.
- Specify the value of corner R of the end-mill using numeric keys.
Corner R of an end-mill refers to the radius of a corner of an end-mill.
This date is used in 3-D machining operations.

4-29
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Comer R of an end -mill M3S021

- For a tapping tool, set the floating tap function or the fixed tap function by pressing
the FLOATING TAP or FIXED TAP menu key.
Press the FLOATING TAP menu key to select “asynchronous” as the type of
tapping, or press the FIXED TAP menu key to select “synchronous” as the type of
tapping.

(10) Move the cursor to the LIFE TIME item, then input tool life time (maximum possible
operating time) using the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
Note: The NC unit cannot manage the life of that tool if “0” remains set at this
item.
(11) Move the cursor to the CUT TIME item, then input tool operating time (cumulative
cutting feed time) in minutes, and press the INPUT key.
- The tool cutting time automatically increments with each cutting feed operation of
the tool. The display status of the CUT TIME data will reverse when the tool
operating time reaches the life time that has been set during step (10) above.
Note: After a new tool has been mounted, input of the tool operating time is not
required (“0” is set in the CUT TIME item automatically).
(12) Move the cursor to the MAT. item, and press the menu key corresponding to the
type of material to be set.
- If a milling tool that has been registered on the TOOL FILE display is registered
here, the corresponding type of material set previously on that display will be auto-
set. (Only if a suffix is set.)
- The material types presented in the menu here refer to the settings on the
CUTTING CONDITION (W.-MAT./T.-MAT.) display.
- Data that has been set in the MAT. item is referred to during automatic setting of
cutting conditions or used as tutorial data relating to cutting conditions in the
MAZATROL program, based on the data that has been registered on the
CUTTING CONDITION display.
(13) Move the cursor to the THRUST F. item, then input data using the numeric keys,
and press the INPUT key.
- Data that the NC unit is to calculate can be set by pressing the AUTO SET menu
key, instead of setting data using the numeric keys.
- When the AUTO SET menu key is pressed, the NC equipment will calculate the
maximum permissible load value of the Z-axis servomotor and automatically set
the adequate thrust force coefficient (%).

4-30
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
- If you have selected TAP as the tool name and “Synchronous” as the method of
tapping, set a returning speed rate (%) for that synchronous tapping tool in this
item.
Returning speed = Returning speed rate/100 Feed rate
(All returning speed rates less than 100% are handled as 100%.)
Note 1: If the load on the Z-axis servomotor exceeds the percentage value that
has been input to the THR. item, then the cutting feedrate will
automatically decrease and the load will be controlled to within its
permissible limits.
Note 2: Input of data to the THRUST F. item becomes necessary only for end-
mills, drills, chamfering cutters and face-mills.
Note 3: If synchronous tapping cycle machining is required, FIXED TAP must be
selected for AUXIL. item of the TOOL DATA display.
(14) Move the cursor to the HORSE PW item and specify the value using the
appropreate numeric keys, and then press the INPUT key.
- When the AUTO SET menu key is pressed instead of specifying the value using
numeric keys, the value that is calculated by the NC can be set.
- When the AUTO SET menu key is pressed, the NC equipment will calculate the
maximum permissible load value of the spindle servo motor and automatically set
the adequate horse power coefficient (%).
Note 1: If the load on the spindle servo motor exceeds the percentage value that
has been input to the HP item, then the cutting feedrate will automatically
decrease and the load will be controlled to within its permissible limits.
Note 2: Input of data to the HP item becomes necessary only for face-mills, end
mills, boring bars, drills, backspot-facing tools, backboring bars or
chamfering cutters.
(15) Move the cursor to the MAX. ROT. item, then input the maximum rotational speed
of the tool using the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
Note 1: The maximum rotational speed of the tool will not be limited if “0” remains
set in this item.
Note 2: The maximum rotational speed data cannot be set for TOUCH SENSOR
and CHIP VACUUM.
Note: Data that has been set during steps (13) and (14) above is valid only for the
machine models equipped with AFC. The operations described above are not
required for the machine models of standard specifications.

Interchanging pocket numbers (for MAZATROL programs)


The pocket numbers of the tools which have been registered can be interchanged by
carrying out the operation described below.
(16) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and press a cursor key to call up the cursor.
(17) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the line of the tool the pocket number of
which is to be interchanged.
Example: When interchanging pocket number 2 of E-MILL and pocket number 4

4-31
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
of DRILL, as shown below:

Select TNo. 2

(18) Press the EDIT menu key.


(19) Press the TOOLDATA MOVE menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of TOOLDATA MOVE to reverse.
(20) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the interchange destination pocket
number. Then, press the INPUT key.
Í This will cause the pocket number of the end-mill to change to that of the drill,
and these two tools will be rearranged in order of pocket number.
- In the above example, specify 4 and press the INPUT key.
The display on the screen will then change as follows:

Registering the tools to be used


Proceed as follows to register on the TOOL DATA display the tools to be used:
(21) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and press a cursor key to call up the cursor.
(22) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the line of the required TNo.
(23) Press the EDIT menu key.
(24) Press the TOOLDATA ASSIGN menu key .
Í This will cause the following menu to be displayed:

ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH >>>


(a)
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR

4-32
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
- The menu will change over to the following menu if the menu key >>> is pressed:

CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>


(b)
DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM

(25) From among the menus (a) and (b) select the name of the tool to be registered
and press the corresponding menu key.
Í The selected tool name will then be displayed under TOOL.
(26) Move the cursor to the NOM-φ item of the tool to be registered.
(27) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the nominal diameter of the tool
which has been selected in procedural step (5). Then, press the INPUT key
Í The input value will then be displayed under NOM-φ, and the cursor will move
to the immediate right of this value.
The following menu will be displayed.

A B C D E F G H HEAVY >>>
[1]
TOOL

J K L M N P Q R HEAVY >>>
[2]
TOOL

S T U V W X Y Z HEAVY >>>
[3]
TOOL

- Pressing the menu key >>> will change the menu in the order of [1] → [2] → [3] →
[1].
Note: Menus [1] to [3] are provided for assignment of a suffix (code that
identifies tools of the same nominal diameter). For heavy tools, suffix
assignment must be made with the menu item HEAVY TOOL reversed (by
pressing the corresponding menu key).
(28) Select an appropriate suffix from among menus [1] to [3] and press the
corresponding menu key.
Í The selected suffix will then be displayed immediately after the value that has
been set in procedural step (7).
Í The cursor will move to the right of the displayed suffix.
The following menu will be displayed:

ORDINARY LARGE MAG DIR+ MAG DIR- SMALL


(c)
DIAMETER L + - S

- Menu (c) refers to the intra-magazine interference data as follows:


ORDINARY DIAMETER.......Diameter of a tool which completely fits into the
pocket.
LARGE L ..............................Tool which interferes with both next tools in the
pocket.
MAG DIR+ +.........................Tool that interferes with the tool of a larger pocket
number.
MAG DIR– – .........................Tool that interferes with the tool of a smaller

4-33
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
pocket number.
SMALL S ..............................Diameter of a tool which can be placed in a pocket
other than that which interfere with the tool
indicated by “+” or “–”.
(29) Press the corresponding menu key contained in menu (c).
Í The selected type of intra-magazine interference data will be displayed.
Note 1: If shape data or other types of data of the particular tool are to be set following
completion of the tool registration operation, then repeat procedural steps (3)
through (15)
Note 2: When registering a heavy tool, suffix assignment must be preceded by the
selection of the menu item HEAVY TOOL in procedural step (8). If a suffix for
heavy tools is assigned, this causes the ATC (automatic tool change) speed to
decrease, and thus allows safe tool change.
Note 3: Only tools that do not interfere with other tools can be registered.
Note 4: The TNo. display of the tool mounted in the spindle will be highlighted in blue.

Manual measurement of the tool lengths


The actual length of each tool to be used must be measured for setting data under
LENGTH on the TOOL DATA display. Measurement of the tool lengths can be made in
the full-automatic mode, the semi-automatic mode, or the manual mode. Here, the
operating procedure for manual tool-length measurement using the LENGTH TEACH
function of the TOOL DATA display is described. For the full-automatic and semi-
automatic tool-length measurement procedures, see the Operating Manual for machine.
(30) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.
- Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is
accomodated in the magazine pocket. For the operation, see the Operating
Manual for machine.
(31) Move the spindle by manual operation and bring the tool tip into contact with the
top surface of either the reference block or the workpiece of a pre-determined
height.
- For H-type machines, the edge locator of the table functions as reference. For the
operation, see the Operating manual for machine.
(32) Call up the TOOL DATA display on the screen.
(33) Press the LENGTH TEACH menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of LENGTH TEACH to reverse.
Subsequently, the cursor will appear in the position of the LENGTH item of the
tool currently mounted on the spindle.
(34) Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece using the
appropriate numeric key(s), and then press the INPUT key.
Í The NC equipment will then calculate the length of the tool mounted on the
spindle, and the calculated value will be automatically set under LENGTH. (See
the following figure.)

4-34
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Machine
zero-point

Distance from the


machine zero-
point to the
current position of Distance from the
Manual axis the machine machine zero-
movement point to the table
surface
(constant)

Current position
of the machine
Tool length

Distance from
the table surface Reference block
to the tool tip or workpiece

Table

Tool length measurement M3S022

Note: In the case of the figure shown below, specify “0” and press the INPUT key.

Table
M3S023

- Since the current position of the machine is stored in the memory of the NC
equipment, it will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference block
or workpiece (i.e., the distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is specified.
- The reverse-display status of LENGTH TEACH will be released automatically.

4-35
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Other functions (for MAZATROL programs)

4. TOOL SEARCH

This menu function should be used to search for a tool name that is registered on the
TOOL DATA display.
(1) Press the TOOL SEARCH menu key.
Í The following menu will be displayed

ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH >>>


(a)
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR

- Pressing the menu key >>> changes the above menu over to the following menu:

CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>


(b)
DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM

(2) From among menus (a) and (b), select the menu item that corresponds to the tool
name to be searched for, and press the appropriate menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of the selected menu item to reverse.
(3) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the nominal diameter value of the tool
name to be searched for. Then, press the INPUT key.
Í If the tool name to be searched for is already registered, the line of the tool
concerned will be displayed and highlighted.
Example: When checking the pocket number under which a drill with a nominal
diameter of 10 mm is registered:
After pressing the DRILL menu key in procedural step (2), specify 10
and press the INPUT key in procedural step (3).
This will cause the line concerned to be highlighted as shown below.

This shows that the tool to be searched for is registered under pocket
number 4.
- If the INPUT key is pressed following this, the NC unit will check whether another
corresponding tool exists in the subsequent area, and the line of the tool
concerned will be highlighted next. If no corresponding tools can be found any
more, then the alarm message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be
displayed.

4-36
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Note: It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying
TOOL item. In this case, press only the INPUT key in procedural step (3)
without specifying the nominal diameter.

5. TOOLDATA ERASE

Use this menu function to erase tool data registered on the TOOL DATA display.
(1) Press the cursor key to select the line of the tool data to be erased.
Example: On the display shown below, if the E-MILL data of tool number 2 is to
be erased:

Select TNo. 2.

(2) Press the EDIT menu key.


(3) Press the TOOLDATA ERASE menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of TOOLDATA ERASE to reverse.
(4) Press the INPUT key.
Í Selected tool data will be erased.

6. TOOLNAME ORDER (displayed only for machines with a random ATC feature)

For machines having a random ATC feature, use this menu function if the tool data
previously registered on the TOOL DATA display is to be rearranged in order of tool
name.
(1) Press the EDIT menu key.
(2) Press the TOOLNAME ORDER menu key.
Í This will cause the display of TOOLNAME ORDER to reverse.
(3) Press the INPUT key.
Í The tool data will be rearranged in order of tool name.
If there are more than one set of tool data having the same name, those sets of
tool data will be rearranged in order of the smaller nominal diameter first.

4-37
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The order of tool name refers to the following order:
CTR-DR DRILL REAM TAP (M, U, PT, PF, PS, OTHER, in that order)
BK FACE BOR BAR B-B BAR CHF-C F-MILL E-MILL OTHER
CHP VAC T.SENS B-E-MIL
Example: To rearrange the tool data on the following display:
(A) (B)

Note: “In order of tool name” operations cannot be carried out while the spindle has a
mounted tool.

7. BORDER VALUE

Proceed as follows to set the pecking threshold level for a drill:


(1) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor in the TOOL LIST area onto the line of a drill
for which the threshold is to be set.
(2) Press the BORDER VALUE menu key.
Í The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box
will appear:

(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the text box “TORQUE”.
(4) Enter the required value using the numeric keys and press the INPUT key.
Í The threshold will be set definitively and the dialogue box will disappear.

8. Setting PKNo. data (Valid only for machine with a random ATC feature)

If your machine has a random ATC feature, use the following procedure to set PKNo.
item on the TOOL DATA display (PKNo. data can be set even during the write-protected
status).
(1) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and select the line of the tool required by using the cursor keys.
(2) Press the Tab key to select the right column (CONTENTS).
(3) Select the data box “PKNo.” by using the cursor keys, key in the required pocket
number and press the INPUT key.

4-38
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Setting tool data (for EIA/ISO programs)
Setting data in ACT-φ CORR. or No. items and LENG CORR. or No. items of this display
allows tool designation and tool life management using an EIA/ISO program.
(4) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and select the line of the required tool by using the cursor keys.
(5) Press the Tab key to select the right colum (CONTENTS).
(6) Select the data box “GROUP No.” by using the cursor keys.
(7) Specify a group number using the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
- Any group number from 0 to 99999999 can be set for the tool. Set one and the
same group number for multiple tools of the same type (in terms of both shape
and dimensions) in order that they shall be used as a spare tool for each other.
Note: Group number 0 is not subjected to spare-tool searching.
- When the group number is set, the tool ID number will also be displayed at the
same time. To check details of the tool ID number, see Note 3 that follows.
(8) Select the data box “ACT-φ CORR.” by using the cursor keys.
(9) Input tool diameter offset data using the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool diameter offset data is set, the No. item on the right will become
blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
(10) Select the data box “LENG KORR.” by using the cursor keys.
(11) Input tool length offset data using the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool length offset data is set, the No. item on the right will become blank
to indicate that the item has become invalid.
- For the current tool on the spindle only, tool length offset data can be set using the
LENG-OFS TEACH menu function.
(12) Select the data box “No.” on the right of ACT-φ CORR.
(13) Input the offset number under which the tool diameter offset data to be referred to
has been set on the TOOL OFFSET display, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool diameter offset number is set, the ACT-φ CORR. item will become
blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
(14) Select the data box “No.” on the right of LENG CORR.
(15) Input the offset number under which the tool length offset data to be referred to
has been set on the TOOL OFFSET display, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool length offset number is set, the LENG CORR. item will become
blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
Note 1: Tool length offset data and tool diameter offset data are to be set by either
setting the data directly on this display or setting the offset numbers
corresponding to the offset data that has been previously set on the TOOL
OFFSET display.

4-39
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Note 2: When the tool for which the offset data has been set on this display is to be
used during execution of the program, the offset data (or offset number data)
that has been set on this display will govern even if another offset data number
has been designated in the program.
Example:
Program

M
H1 Tool length offset number The offset data enclosed in becomes valid
Tool diameter offset number according to these blocks.
D2
T01T0M06 The offset data used for this block will be the data enclosed in according
M to the settings as shown below on the TOOL DATA display.

TOOL OFFSET display TOOL DATA display

No. OFFSET
1 10.1
2 10.2
3 10.3
4 10.4
5 10.5

The program is executed according to the tool diameter offset data (No. 4 =
10.4) and tool length offset data (No. 5 = 10.5) that have been set on the TOOL
DATA display, instead of the tool length offset data (H1 = 10.1) and tool
diameter offset data (D2 = 10.2) that have been designated in the program.
Note 3: For a machine that has a tool ID number option, tools can be managed using
ID No. data. The data is to be set within either one of the following two ranges,
depending on the particular type of tool ID:
- Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)
- Eight hexadecimal digits (0 to FFFFFFFF)
For a machine that does not have a tool ID number option, ID No. data does
not have a meaning. The data can be freely used as tool identification numbers
or for any other purposes. In that case, the data can be set within the range up
to eight decimal digits.
Note 4: If data is not displayed under “GROUP No.” or “TOOL” then data can be set
under “GROUP No.”, and when any data has been set under “GROUP No.”

4-40
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
under that state, then data can be further set under “ID No.”, “ACT-φ CORR.”
(or “No.”), “LENG CORR.” (or “No.”), “LIFE TIME”, “CUT TIME”, “ACT-φ”,
“LENGTH”, “LENG COMP.”, “THRUST F.”, “HORSE PW” and “MAX. ROT.”

Setting tool group numbers


If a group number is set for the tools that are to be used during execution of the program,
the next spare tool to be used will be auto-selected from tools of the same group
number.

9. Selection of spare tools

As listed below, two methods are available to select spare tools. Either is to be selected
by setting 0 or 1 in bit 2 of parameter F84.
- F84 bit 2 = 0: Group number scheme
- F84 bit 2 = 1: Tool name scheme

A. Group number scheme

Tools of the same group number are all regarded as spare ones, and tools that have
neither yet reached their lives nor become damaged are automatically selected in order
with the smallest tool number first.

B. Tool name scheme

Tools of the same tool name, the same nominal diameter, and the same suffix are all
regarded as spare ones, and tools that have neither yet reached their lives nor become
damaged are automatically selected in order with the smallest tool number first.
Note: If all spare tools have reached their lives or become damaged, life-expired one
having the largest tool number will be selected first.

10. Designation of tool numbers in the EIA/ISO program

As listed below, two methods are available to designate tool numbers in the EIA/ISO
program. Either is to be selected by setting 0 or 1 in bit 4 of parameter F94.
- F94 bit 4 = 0: Group number designation scheme
- F94 bit 4 = 1: Tool number designation scheme

A. Group number designation scheme

The T-command in the program is taken as the command for group number (GROUP
No.). Tools with the same GROUP No. as that of the commanded GROUP No. are
selected as spare tools.
In this group number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for
group No. 1. In case the group number “1” has been assigned for TNo. 2 and TNo. 3 on
the TOOL DATA display, the tool of TNo. 3 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 2 has
already expired.

B. Tool number designation scheme

The T-command in the program is taken as the command for tool number (TNo.). Tools
with the same GROUP No. as that of the commanded TNo. are selected as spare tools.
In this tool number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for

4-41
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
TNo. 1. In case the group number “2” has been assigned for TNo. 1 and TNo. 4 on the
TOOL DATA display, the tool of TNo. 4 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 1 has
already expired.
Note: For both schemes, if there are multiple tools of the same group number, the
appropriate tool will be selected according to the particular method of selecting
spare tools.

Manual measurement of tool lengths (Setting tool length offset data using the LENG-
OFS TEACH menu function)
The LENG-OFS TEACH menu function can be used to set tool length data in the LENG
CORR.
(1) Manually move the axes, and bring the nose of the tool into contact with the top of
either a reference block or a workpiece whose height is predetermined.
- Refer to the Operating Manual of the machine for further details of manual
operations.
(2) Press the LENG-OFS TEACH menu key.
Í The display status of the LENG-OFS TEACH menu item will then reverse, and
the LENG CORR. item of the tool currently mounted on the spindle will be
selected.
(3) Input the height of either the reference block or the workpiece, and press the INPUT
key.
Í The NC unit will then calculate the tool length and auto-set the calculated data
under the LENG CORR. item.
- The LENG-OFS TEACH menu item will return to its normal display status.

Other functions (for EIA/ISO programs)

11. ADD. DATA CANCEL menu function

Use this menu function to erase only GROUP No. and ID No. data.
(1) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and select the line of the required tool by using the cursor keys.
(2) Press the EDIT menu key.
(3) Press the ADD. DATA CANCEL menu key.
(4) Press the INPUT key.
Í The added data (GROUP/ID No.) of the tool selected in Step (1) will then be
erased.

MAZATROL tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option)

12. Overview

“INVALIDATION” is an option that makes registered MAZATROL tool data on the TOOL
DATA display invalid during program execution. The invalidated tool data is indicated by
DSBL under “STATUS” for distinction from valid tool data.

4-42
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Using this option, you can select tools from all those of the same type or set the tools not
to be used without deleting the tool data before executing the program.

13. Making the tool data valid/invalid

(1) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST)
beforehand, and select the line of the required tool by using the cursor keys.
(2) Press the EDIT menu key.
(3) To make the data selected in (1) valid/invalid, press the menu key TOOLDATA
VALID or TOOL DATA INVALID respectively.
(4) Press the INPUT key.

“DSBL” for indication of an


invalid tool

14. Machine action

Only in the following cases, tools designated as invalid (DSBL) on the TOOL DATA
display are regarded as invalid tools.
A. during automatic operation
B. during tool path check
C. during “tool layout”

A. Automatic operation

The machine action differs as follows between MAZATROL program automatic operation
and EIA/ISO program automatic operation:

1. MAZATROL program operation


Invalid tools are excluded from a list of usable tools. An alarm 626 NO TOOL IN
MAGAZINE will be displayed if an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not
present.
2. EIA/ISO program operation
The MAZATROL tool data invalidation option is inoperative for automatic operation
using EIA/ISO programs, since the EIA/ISO program normally operates
independently of MAZATROL tool data. Only if MAZATROL tool length and diameter
offset data is valid for EIA/ISO program, however, does this option become
operative. In this case, if the MAZATROL tool data of the selected tool number is
invalid, operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED after tool change has been done.

(a) If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is valid (that is, if tool
diameter offset is made valid using bit 7 of user parameter F92 and tool length
data is made valid using bit 3 of user parameter F93):

4-43
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED.
(b) If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is invalid:
Normal operation continues.
Note: Operation will also stop with an alarm display, if a block that contains a
command for tool change with an invalid tool is found during EIA/ISO search
associated with restart.

B. Tool path check is performed

The machine action differs as follows between tool path check using a MAZATROL
program and tool path check using an EIA/ISO program:
1. During tool path check using a MAZATROL program
Invalid tools are not selected. If an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not
present, a tool path will be drawn in the absence of a tool (diameter offsetting will
use the tool nominal diameter data existing in the program).
2. During tool path check using an EIA/ISO program
The machine action is similar to that existing during automatic operation.

C. TOOL LAYOUT

All invalid tools will be indicated as “DSBL” on the TOOL LAYOUT display.
TOOL LAYOUT display

Note: With the menu function PKNo. SHIFT, the tool numbers of invalid tools are not
assigned to tools displayed under NEXT.

15. In combination with the optional “GROUP No. assignment”

When the MAZATROL tool data option “GROUP No. assignment” is used, tool
commands in an EIA/ISO program are executed according to the group number data of
the MAZATROL tool data display.
The machine action during automatic operation (or tool path check) based on an EIA/ISO
program, therefore, differs from that occurring with the tool data option “GROUP No.
assignment” not being used.
The machine acts as follows according to the particular method of selecting tools:
1. Group number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 0)

4-44
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
- The machine will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED if the tools of the selected group number are all invalid ones.
- If the tools of the selected group number include valid ones (life-expired or broken
tools included), then these valid tools will be searched for a spare tool.
2. Tool number scheme (User parameter F92, bit 4 = 1)
When the tool of the selected tool number is invalid:
(a) If a group number has been set, a spare tool search will be made using that
group number. The machine action after the search has been made is the
same as that described for the group number scheme above.
(b) If a group number has not been set, an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED will result.

Example: Differences in machine action between the two tool selection schemes:

TNo. GROUP No. STATUS


1 12345678 DSBL
2
3 87654321 DSBL
4 87654321

For the settings on the TOOL DATA display as shown above:

Group number scheme Tool number scheme


Example 1: Example 1:
If T12345678T0M06 is set: If T01T0M06 is set:
An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED
results. results.
Example 2: Example 2:
If T87654321T0M06 is set: If T03T0M06 is set:
Tool of TNo. 4 is selected. Tool of TNo. 4 is selected.

Note:
The machine action during automatic operation and that of tool path check are the same.

4-45
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Tool length listing window

16. Outline

The tool length-listing window is provided on the TOOL DATA display in order for the
operator to easily enter data of items LENGTH, LENG COMP. and ACT-φ for multiple
tools without having to select each time the particular tool for the CONTENTS area. The
LENGTH TEACH menu function and incremental data input are also available for data
entry through the listing window.
Press the TOOL LENGTH menu key to call up the listing window, and press the same
menu key anew to close it.

17. Description of the display data in the TOOL LENGTH listing window

No. Item Unit Data description


TNo. Pocket number
LENGTH mm (inch) Tool length
LENG COM mm (inch) Cutting-end position compensation value
ACT-φ mm (inch) Actual diameter of the tool

4-46
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

TOOL LAYOUT DISPLAY

4-47
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-48
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

TOOL LAYOUT Display


Function:
- This display is used on the screen when assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be
used for machining or erasing the registered tool names.
Remarks:
- The operation of assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be used is referred to as tool
layout.
- The TOOL LAYOUT display can be used only when executing a MAZATROL program.

Data display

1. Displayed data

D735S1011E

4-49
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

2. Display data description

NO. ITEM UNIT Data description


CURRENT PKNO. Pocket number for the current tools
CURRENT TOOL Tool name for the current tools
CURRENT ACT-φ mm (inch) Nominal diameter of the current tools
Suffix (code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter) for the
current tools
STATUS Information upon the status of the current tools
WNo. Work number of the specified program
NEXT PKNo. Pocket number for the next tools
NEXT TOOL Tool name for the next tools
NEXT ACT-φ mm (inch) Nominal diameter of the next tools
Suffix (code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter) for the
next tools

Note 1: The CURRENT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of the tools
which already are each assigned a pocket number. That is, the CURRENT
display indicates the same status of tool registration as with the TOOL DATA
display for the current program.
Note 2: The NEXT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of all the tools
necessary to execute the specified machining program.

Tool layout procedure


(1) Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.
Í The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have already been
registered will be indicated on the CURRENT display. (No display will be
presented if no tools have been registered.)
- The WORK No. item will have already been placed in a reverse-display status by
the time that the display is called on the screen.
(2) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the work number of the machining
program to be executed. Then, press the INPUT key.
Í This will cause the reverse-display status of WORK No. to be cleared and the
input work number to be displayed in the WORK No. item (data portion ).
- The names and nominal diameters of all the tools to be used under the program
whose work number has been input will be indicated on the NEXT display. Under
the PKNo. item, 0 will be displayed for any tool name.
(3) Subsequent operations differ according to several factors such as the registration
status of the tools which are already registered on the CURRENT display. However,
separate or combined use of the three methods described below makes it possible
in any cases to assign pocket numbers to all the tools to be used. Select the most
appropriate method according to the particular tool-registration or other status.
A. Pocket-number shift
B. Automatic pocket-number assignment
C. Manual pocket-number assignment

4-50
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
A. Pocket-number shift
If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the CURRENT
display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display, it is no longer
necessary then to assign pocket numbers to such tools. That is, the pocket numbers
that have already been assigned can be shifted as they are. This method is referred
to as pocket-number shift. Once a pocket-number shift operation has been carried
out, it suffices just to assign pocket numbers to the tools for which no shift
operations have been carried out.
(A-1) Press the PKNo. SHIFT menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of PKNo. SHIFT to reverse.
(A-2) Press the INPUT key.
Í If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the
CURRENT display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display, then
the pocket numbers already assigned under PKNo. of the corresponding tool
names will be shifted automatically to the NEXT display and will be indicated in
reverse-display status.
Example: If the following data is displayed when the work number of a machining
program has been input in the procedural step (2) above:

CURRENT NEXT WNo.123


PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
1 F-MILL 80. A 0 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A 0 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8. 0 CTR-DR 20.
4 CHF-C 20. A 0 DRILL 10.
5 0 DRILL 7.
6 0 TAP M8.

Of the tools being indicated on the NEXT display, a face-mill with a nominal
diameter of 80 mm, end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm, and a tap with
a nominal diameter of 8 mm are already registered on the CURRENT display
(in dotted line). Here, if procedural steps (A-1) and (A-2) are carried out, then
the display will change as follows:

CURRENT NEXT WNo.123


PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
1 F-MILL 80. A 1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A 2 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8. 0 CTR-DR 20.
4 CHF-C 20. A 0 DRILL 10.
5 0 DRILL 7.
6 3 TAP M8.

The pocket numbers on the CURRENT display will shift automatically and the
display status of the pocket numbers on the NEXT display will be reversed.
Í Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PKNo. SHIFT will be cleared.
Note: In the above example, when pocket numbers are assigned to all the
remaining tools (that is, a spot drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm, a

4-51
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
drill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm, and a drill with a nominal diameter
of 7 mm) by method B. or C. described below, the pocket-number
assignment procedure for all the tools will be completed.
B. Automatic pocket-number assignment
This method is one in which, among the tool names being displayed on the NEXT
display, all those with pocket numbers of 0 (undetermined) are automatically
assigned serial pocket numbers, starting with the top tool name on the display first.
Note: In this method, the data being indicated on the CURRENT display will be
disregarded.
(B-1) Press the PKNo. ASSIGN menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of PKNo. ASSIGN to reverse.
(B-2) Press the INPUT key.
Í Serial pocket numbers will then be automatically assigned to each tool that has
a pocket number of 0 (undetermined), starting with the top one on the display
first.
Example 1:
When the names of the tools to be Here, if procedural steps (B-1) and (B-2)
are carried out, then the display will change
used are being indicated on the NEXT as follows:
display as shown below:

NEXT WNo.123 NEXT WNo.123


PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
0 F-MILL 80. A 1 F-MILL 80. A
0 E-MILL 10. A 2 E-MILL 10. A
0 CTR-DR 20. 3 CTR-DR 20.
0 DRILL 10. 4 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 7. 5 DRILL 7.
0 TAP M8. 6 TAP M8.

Example 2:
In the example shown below, if pocket Here, if procedural steps (B-1) and (B-2)
are carried out, then the display will change
numbers are already assigned to the as follows:
face-mill with a nominal diameter of 80
mm, the end-mill with a nominal
diameter of 10 mm, and the tap with a
nominal diameter of 8 mm (see the
example in the description of “Pocket-
number shift” above):

4-52
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

NEXT WNo.123 NEXT WNo.123


PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
1 F-MILL 80. A 1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A 2 E-MILL 10. A
0 CTR-DR 20. 4 CTR-DR 20.
0 DRILL 10. 5 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 7. 6 DRILL 7.
3 TAP M8. 3 TAP M8.

Except the pocket numbers already assigned (i.e., pocket number 1, 2, and 3),
serial ones will be assigned starting with the top tool name on the display first.
Í Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PKNo. ASSIGN will be cleared.
C. Manual pocket-number and tool interference data assignment
This method is one in which the tools being indicated on the NEXT display are
respectively assigned serial pocket numbers and tool interference data one by one.
(C-1) Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the screen.
(C-2) Press the the cursor key to move the cursor to the row of the tool name to which a
pocket number must be assigned is displayed.
Example: If the screen on the NEXT display is presented as shown below (see the
example given in the description of “Pocket-number shift” above) and pocket
number 4 and tool interference data are to be assigned to a spot drill with a
nominal diameter of 20 mm:
NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ


1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
0 CTR-DR 20.
0 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 10.
3 TAP M8.
Move the cursor to this position

(C-3) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the pocket number to be assigned.
Then, press the INPUT key.
Í The input pocket number will then be displayed in the position where the cursor
is blinking.
(C-4) Pressing the cursor key moves cursor to the right of the nominal diameter data
suffix.
Í The following menu will then be displayed.

ORDINARY LARGE MAG DIR MAG DIR SMALL


DIAMETER L + - S
+ -

The menu shows types of intra-magazine interference data:


ORDINARY DIAMETER ......Tool which completely fits into that pocket.

4-53
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
LARGE L .............................Tool which interferes with both next tools in the pocket.
MAG DIR + + Tool that interferes with the tool of a larger pocket
number.
MAG DIR – –........................Tool that interferes with the tool of a smaller pocket
number.
SMALL S..............................Diameter of a tool which can be placed in a pocket
other than that which interfere with the tool indicated by
“MAG DIR +” or “MAG DIR –”.
(C-5) Press the menu key that corresponds to the tool interference data you want to set.
Í The tool interference data will be displayed at the cursor.
- In the example shown above, press the LARGE L menu key.
The display will then change as follows:

NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ


1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
4 CTR-DR 20. L
0 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 7.
3 TAP M8.

Note: By repeating procedural steps (C-2) to (C-5), it is possible to assign the


desired pocket numbers to all tools whose pocket number display is 0
(undetermined).
However, it is not possible to assign the same pocket number as that
which has already been used on the NEXT display.
After pocket numbers have been assigned to all the required tools on the NEXT
display by one or more of the methods A., B. and C., proceed with the operations
described below.

(4) Press the LAYOUT FINISH menu key.


Í This will cause the display status of LAYOUT FINISH to reverse.
(5) Press the INPUT key.
Í The names of the tools to which pocket numbers have been assigned on the
NEXT display will then be indicated on the CURRENT display in order of
pocket number. The display on the NEXT display will remain unchanged.
Note: Even if the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display
are already used on the CURRENT display, the tool names with the
former will govern and those with the latter will be erased.
Example: If the data on the CURRENT and NEXT displays is as shown below:

4-54
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
CURRENT NEXT WNo.123
PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
1 F-MILL 80. A 1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A 2 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8. 4 CTR-DR 20.
4 CHF-C 20. A 5 DRILL 10.
5 6 DRILL 7.
6 3 TAP M8.

Here, if procedural steps (4) and (5) are carried out, the display will change as
follows:

CURRENT NEXT WNo.123


PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ
1 F-MILL 80. A 1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A 2 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8. 4 CTR-DR 20.
4 CTR-DR 20. 5 DRILL 10.
5 DRILL 10. 6 DRILL 7.
6 DRILL 7. 3 TAP M8.

That is, the tool names with pocket numbers assigned on the NEXT display will
be indicated in order of pocket number on the CURRENT display.
The chamfering cutter with a nominal diameter of 20 mm that has been
registered under pocket number 4 will be erased automatically (see Note
above).
Í The reverse-display status of LAYOUT FINISH will be cleared.
All the tool layout operations have been finished.
Note: If, after you have pressed the LAYOUT FINISH menu key following
selection of intra-magazine interference data, tools that are likely to
interfere with other tools or pockets are found, then the layout operation
will stop in the middle and the data display of the tools that are likely to
interfere will be highlighted red.

Clearing pocket numbers


If a wrong pocket number has been assigned during tool layout on the NEXT display,
carry out the layout operation once again after resetting all the tool pocket numbers to 0
using the following procedure.
(6) Press the PKNo. CLEAR menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of PKNo. CLEAR to reverse.
(7) Press the INPUT key.
Í All the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display will be
reset to 0 and the reverse-display status of PKNo. CLEAR will be released.

4-55
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Specifying a spare tool


If the tool data being indicated on the NEXT display includes the data of the tool which
needs a spare tool, it is possible to specify the spare tool on this display.
(8) Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the NEXT display.
(9) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNo. data item of the tool which
needs a spare tool.
Example: When the data shown below is indicated on the NEXT display and a spare
tool is to be specified for the end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm:
NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ


1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
3 CTR-DR 20.
4 DRILL 10.
5 DRILL 7.

Move the cursor to this position

(10) Press the SPARE T ADDITION menu key.


Í This will cause the display status of SPARE T ADDITION to reverse.
(11) Press the INPUT key.
Í The data of a spare tool will be displayed directly under the data of the tool
which needs a spare tool.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:

NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ


1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
0 E-MILL 10. A
3 CTR-DR 20.
4 DRILL 10.
5 DRILL 7.

Í The reverse-display status of SPARE T ADDITION will be released.


Note: The pocket number of a spare tool is displayed as 0 (undetermined), as shown
above. Therefore, a pocket number must be assigned to the spare tool after the
above operation has been carried out.

4-56
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Erasing spare tool data


Proceed as follows to erase specified spare tool data:
(12) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNo. item of the spare tool data to
be erased.
- First call the cursor on the screen if it is not being indicated on the NEXT display.
(13) Press the SPARE T ERASE menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of SPARE T ERASE to reverse.
(14) Press the INPUT key.
Í The spare tool data being indicated on the NEXT display will be erased, and
the reverse-display status of SPARE T ERASE will be released.

Erasing procedures for registered tool data


All or part of the tool data registered on the CURRENT display of the TOOL LAYOUT
display, (i.e., the tool data that has already been laid out) can be erased.

3. Partial erasure of registered tool data

(1) Press the cursor key to move the cursor (here: reverse display) to the line of the tool
data to be erased.
Example: When tools are registered as shown below and the data of the drill with
a nominal diameter of 10 mm is to be erased:

CURRENT
PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS
1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8.
4 CTR-DR 20.
5 DRILL 10.
6 DRILL 7.

Move the reverse display onto this line.

(2) Press the TOOLDATA ERASE menu key.


Í This will cause the display of TOOLDATA ERASE to reverse.
(3) Press the INPUT key.
Í The data of the tool on the reverse-display line will be erased.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:
CURRENT
PKNo. TOOL ACT-φ STATUS
1 F-MILL 80. A
2 E-MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8.
4 CTR-DR 20.
5
6 DRILL 7.

Tool data has been erased.

4-57
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Í The reverse-display status of TOOLDATA ERASE will be released.

4. Total erasure of registered tool data

(1) Press the menu selector key to display LAYOUT CANCEL.


(2) Press the LAYOUT CANCEL menu key.
Í This will cause the display status of LAYOUT CANCEL to reverse.
(3) Specify −9999 with the numeric keys and then press the INPUT key.
Í The entire tool data that has been registered on the CURRENT display will then
be erased and the reverse-display status of LAYOUT CANCEL will be
released.

Other functions

5. TOOL SEARCH

This menu data should be used to search for a tool name that is registered on the
CURRENT display.
The operating procedure is similar to that used for TOOL SEARCH of the TOOL DATA
display.

4-58
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Miscellaneous Operations

4-59
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-60
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Miscellaneous Operations

BACKGROUND OPERATION

Whilst the machine tool is running “in cycle”, it is possible to perform


certain operations at the control panel, -ie. perform a 'background operation'.
No special menus have to be selected to request to work in background.

Types of operations that are allowed in the background mode are:

a) View any screen.


b) Enter a new program.
c) EDIT an existing program already stored in the controls memory except for
the program currently running in cycle or any associated sub programs.
d) Perform a CHECK or SHAPE CHECK on the program currently being
edited.
e) Perform a TOOL PATH CHECK.
f) ERASE or RENUMBER a program except for the program currently
running in cycle or any associated sub programs.
g) COPY any program or unit from any program currently stored in the
controls memory.
h) Enter a NAME against a program in the Program File, except for the
program currently running in cycle or any associated sub programs.
i) Perform DATA I/O. (SAVE all data but only LOAD Programs).
j) Enter LIFE and TIME data on the Tool Data screen.
k) Print out a HARD COPY of the data displayed on the screen, or PRINT
OUT a Program listing.
l) Enter TOOL OFFSET, WORK OFFSET or ADDITIONAL WPC data.
m) Perform a TOOL SEARCH on the Tool Data or Tool Layout screens.
n) Enter CUTTING CONDITION Data.
o) Enter MAINTENANCE CHECK Data.
p) Enter COMMON VARIABLE Data.

If an operation is attempted in 'background' that is not permitted by the control,


then the operator will not be allowed to proceed with that operation and a blue
coloured alarm will be displayed:
ALARM No. 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION).
Pressing the CLEAR key clears the alarm and does not stop the machining cycle.

4-61
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
PROGRAM COPY

The PROGRAM COPY function is used to copy the contents of one


program currently stored within the memory of the control, into another program.
There are two methods of achieving this result, namely:

1) Copying a program into an existing partially written program.


The program into which the contents of another program are to be copied must be
in full edit mode, and the cursor must be set on a new, undefined, unit.

Whilst in full edit mode, press the Menu Selection key:


When the Menu Selection key is pressed, the menus used for editing are
displayed.

Press the PROGRAM COPY menu key:

Pressing this key will cause the menu to change to a purple background, a
program file window will appear, and the message appears “WORKPIECE
PROGRAM NUMBER?”
Enter the workpiece number of the program to be copied using the numeric
keypad followed by pressing the [INPUT] key.
The contents of the program selected will then be copied into the current program
starting at the current cursor position.

4-62
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Note:
1. When performing the PROGRAM COPY command, the control will not make
changes to any speed and feed data when the material of the current program
differs from the material of the program from which that unit was copied.
2. Neither the COMMON UNIT (UNo.0), nor the END UNIT can be copied.

2) How to duplicate a complete program.


This procedure must be performed from within the Program File screen.
With the Program File screen selected;
a) Set the cursor on the program number to be duplicated,
b) Select the menu PROGRAM COPY, (See drawing on the next page),
c) The prompt message WORKPIECE No. TO COPY? appears,
d) Enter the workpiece number of the new program to copy to, using the numeric
keypad.
e) Press the [INPUT] key.

CUTTING CONDITION LEARNING FUNCTION

When an automatic speed or feed calculation is performed by the control


during the preparation of a program, the calculation data may be taken from the
standard Cutting Condition data bank, or, possibly from a special CUTTING
CONDITION LEARNING data bank. The Cutting Condition Learning data is
established during a VFC operation in an automatic machining cycle.

Whilst cutting in the automatic machining cycle, the operator may wish to
adjust the speeds and feeds as programmed, by using the percentage override keys
on the control panel. To perform the automatic editing of the newly altered speeds
and feeds in the program, the operator will press the VFC key on the control
panel. At the end of the use of the current tool, the control will not just make the
automatic edit of the override speed and feed percentages, but also record the new
speed and feed data in the Cutting Condition Learning data bank IF User
Parameter F80, Bit 5 = 1. If parameter F80 Bit 5 = 0 then the VFC override
speed and feed data will not be recorded in the Cutting Condition Learning data
bank.

The type of information stored in the Cutting Condition Learning data bank for
any one record of data is;
Tool Name, Tool Dia, Tool Material, Work Material, Drill cycle,
Z cut Depth/Nom Dia%, Radial cut Depth/Nom Dia%, Rgh/Fin Process,
Cutter speed, Cutter feed rate.

4-63
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Note: It is important that the tool material is defined on the Tool Data screen or a
Cutting Condition ’Study’ will not be made.
With regard to the first statement made in this section, when an automatic
speed or feed calculation is performed by the control during the preparation of a
program, and a record exists in the Cutting Condition Learning data bank. If the
recorded data equates to the current program data, then the control will
automatically return the speed and feed that is currently stored in the Cutting
Condition Learning data bank. This applies regardless of the setting of parameter
F80 Bit 5. The speed and feed data will be shown on a yellow background in the
program.

If a record does not exist in the Cutting Condition Learning data bank equating to
the current program data, then the control will automatically return speeds and
feeds based on the data that is stored in the standard Cutting Condition data bank.
The speed and feed data will be shown in white on a black background in the
program.

Up to 112 records of Cutting Condition Learning data can be stored.

ERASE

To summarise rules explained earlier in the course, to erase blocks of data from a
program:
The displayed program to be edited must be in the Edit mode,

To Erase a Sequence line or a Figure line,


Set the cursor on the block (line) to be erased,
Press the MENU SELECT menu key,
Select the ERASE menu,
Press the INPUT key in answer to the prompt message:
ERASE <INPUT>?

Note. If there is only one Sequence line to erase, then the following Figure data
will also be erased.

To Erase a Unit,
Set the cursor on the first line of the unit to be erased,
Press the MENU SELECT menu key,
Select the ERASE menu,
Press the INPUT key in answer to the prompt message:
ERASE <INPUT>?

4-64
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
INSERT

To summarise rules explained earlier in the course, to insert blocks of data into a
program:
The displayed program to be edited must be in the Edit mode,

To Insert a Sequence line or a Figure line,


Set the cursor on the block (line) prior to which a block is to be inserted,
Press the MENU SELECT menu key,
Select the INSERT menu,
Press the INPUT key in answer to the prompt message:
LINE INSERT <INPUT>?

Note. If the cursor is set within the Figure portion of a unit, another figure line
will be inserted.
If the cursor is set within the Sequence portion of a unit, another sequence
line will be inserted.

To Insert a Unit,
Set the cursor on the first line of the unit, prior to which a new unit is to be
inserted,
Press the MENU SELECT menu key,
Select the INSERT menu,
Press the INPUT key in answer to the prompt message:
LINE INSERT <INPUT>?

Note. If the existing unit prior to where the cursor is set contains figure data, then
another figure line will be inserted. To change the newly inserted figure line into a
separate unit, select the SHAPE END menu.

When blocks are erased or inserted the control automatically renumbers the Units,
Sequence lines or Figure lines in all of the parts of the program that are affected
by erasure or insertion.

4-65
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-66
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

LINE ANGLES & LINE VECTORS

4-67
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-68
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

LINE ANGLES & LINE VECTORS

When a LINE is defined in the figure data of an arbitrary shape definition, providing
that the start and end point of X & Y co-ordinates are Given,
then no input is required for the lines angle or direction vector.
But if some of the X & Y co-ordinates are not given then input of additional data should
be considered. This can be done by entering either, the LINE ANGLE or LINE
VECTOR.

In answer to the menu question: ANGLE FROM X-AXIS? , it is only necessary to


define the slope of the line (relative to the X- axis) and not the specific direction. From
the example drawing below, it can be seen that four possible angles can be correctly
entered, they are:
60 deg, 240deg, -120deg, -300deg

X105. Y25

240°
60°

-120°

-300°

In answer to the menu questions: X-AXIS DIRECTION VECTOR? and


Y-AXIS DIRECTION VECTOR?, data giving the slope (or gradient) of the
Lie should be entered.

? PNT 2

X64., Y-25 +15


15
PNT 1 +25
X39., Y-40

25 PNT 1

-15
X-20., Y-75
PNT 2 -25

4-69
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
If any two absolute co-ordinate points on the line, (which can be visualised as extending
from + to – infinity), are known, then the incremental difference between these two
points represents the X & Y axis direction vectors. From a segment of the example
drawing shown on the previous page, by subtracting the absolute co-ordinate values of
one point from the absolute co-ordinate values of the other point, it can be seen that two
possible answers can be correctly entered, namely:

I25. J15. Or I-25. J-15.

Where I & J are the X & Y axis direction vector addresses respectively.

4-70
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-71
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-72
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE 22-PROGRAM LISTING

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 DUCT IRN 50. 1 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 10. 10. * 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 32. A ? ? CW G01 9.4 22.4 17 0.271 8
F 2 E-MILL 32. B ? ? CW G01 * 22.4 63 0.312 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 115. -80. -60. -45.
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 LINE -50. 40.
3 LINE -50. -65.
4 LINE -20. -75.
5 LINE ? ? 25. 15.
6 LINE 105. 25. 60.
7 LINE -50. 40.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-73
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-74
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MMS Unit

4-75
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-76
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MMS Unit

The MMS unit automatically compensates the workpiece coordinates system by


performing the centering measurement in automatic operation mode.
The measuring movement is performed by specifying the Probe (touch sensor)
as a tool and the type of measurement.
Procedure for calling up the MMS unit

Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu
keys). The following menu will be displayed.

Press the menu key OTHER. The following menu will be displayed.

Press the menu key MMS.

Composition of the unit


Data setting in MMS unit

Uno. UNIT TOOL NOM-φ U. SKIP $


MMS T. SENS

Cursor position Description


Specify the nominal diameter of the Probe stylus.
NOM-φ
Enters the aproximate diameter of the Probe stylus, by means of numeric keys.
Specify whether the MMS unit is executed or not.

U. SKIP Execution .............................................................................................


0

Non-execution ......................................................................................
1

4-77
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Composition of the sequence

Setting sequence data


SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1

Cursor position Description


Select the type of measurement from the following menus. Pressing the menu key >>> changes
the menu a b a in this order.

X Y Z X Y X Y PTN
>>>
PTN FACE FACE FACE GRV GRV STP STP END
a

X-Y X-Y X-Y-th CALIBR. PTN


>>>
BORE BOSS CNR END
b
X, Y, Z Specify the measurment starting position by means of numeric keys.
Specify the positioning coordinate of the 4th axis for measurement movement by means of
4
numeric keys.
Specify the surface coordinates to be measured by means of numeric keys.
R
Note: The contents of the entry vary according to the type of measurement.
Specify the diameter of the hole, the diameter of the boss, the width of the groove, the width of
D/L the projection, etc. by means of numeric keys.
Note: The contents of the entry differ according to the type of measurement.
Specify the feed distance at skip speed by means of numeric keys.
K The term skip speed means the feed speed at the time when the probe comes into contact with
the surface to be measured.

Note 1: The measurement movement is executed after the movement,


if any, on the fourth axis.
Note 2: During the process of the measurement movement, the block
by block stop and rapid feed deceleration are effective, but not
the override of skip feed.
Note 3: The MMS unit performs the movement in the initial basic
coordinates system until the completion of all the types of
measurement specified in the unit.

4-78
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

EXAMPLE.
UNo. UNIT X Y th Z 4
1 WPC-0 -300. -400. 0. -300. 0.
UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-φ No. U. SKIP $
2 MMS T. SENS 5. 0.

SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R
1 X-FACE -20. 0. -10. 0. 0.
2 Y-FACE 0. -20. -10. 0. 0.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


3 DRILLING 10. 20. 0.5

In the above example, all the types of measurement in the


MMS unit are executed according to the data of the basic
coordinates unit .
From unit , the machining is performed according to the
new system of basic coordinates (workpiece zero point)
corrected in the MMS unit .
The data of the basic coordinates unit are rewritten for each
type of measurement.
Note 4: When the common unit contains the workpiece multi-piece
machining command, the MMS unit is only executed the first
time.
Note 5: The compensation is made correctly even when the basic
coordinates unit and the MMS unit are entered separately in
the main program and in the sub-program.
Note 6: Except for measurement of inclinations, no measurements
can be correctly performed if an angle has been set in article
th of the basic coordinates unit.
Note 7: Before execution of the MMS unit turn off the Mirror image
function.
The measurement movement after contact with the workpiece
may not be correctly performed if the Mirror image function is
valid.

4-79
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measuring the length of the Probe


It is necessary to measure the length of the feeler in order to enter the
data into the article LENGTH on the TOOL DATA display. This
section describes the tool length measurement in manual mode using
the TEACH function on the TOOL DATA display.
(1) Mount the Probe on the spindle.
(2) In manual mode, move the axes in order to bring the point of the
stylus to the upper face of the reference block, or to a workpiece
of which the height is known.
In the case of horizontal type machine an edge locator is used for
setting the reference surface.
(3) In manual handle speed mode, slowly move the Z axis until the
contact light (MMS) in the CNC signal window comes on.

Contact light

D735P0069

(4) Call up the TOOL DATA display.


(5) Press the menu key TEACH.
Í The cursor appears in the article LENGTH on the display.
(6) Enter the height of the reference block or of the workpiece by
means of numeric keys.
Í The NC equipment calculates the length of the Probe and the
value thus obtained is automatically entered in the article
LENGTH.

4-80
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Horizontal type

Distance from L5
Operation (1) machine zero
point to the
actual position
of the machine

Distance from
Operation (2) the machine
zero point to the
table
(parameter L5)

Table

Length
of feeler Edge locator

Distance In this situation, press the keys in the TOOL


from the table Reference block DATA display, in the following order:
to the tip or workpiece
0
of the feeler the menu key TEACH, and .

Table
M3P336

Since the NC equipment memorizes the actual position of the


machine, the length of the Probe (distance from the table to the point
of the stylus), is automatically calculated if the height of the reference
block or of the workpiece is specified.

Feeler calibration measurement


The calibration measurement function serves to automatically record,
in parameters, the main measurement correction point of the stylus,
the alignment deviation of the stylus and the tool shank (in X, Y), and
the functional clearance and inertia feed of the machine itself, etc.

2 × Mx

2 × My ex : Alignment deviation correction on X axis


ey ey : Alignment deviation correction on Y axis
Mx: Correction of the form of the point of feeler
on X axis
My: Correction of the form of the point of feeler
ex on Y axis
Point of feeler Spindle center

M3P337

Fig. -1 Correction of calibration measurement

4-81
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

(7) Mount a Ring Gauge having a reference hole of 50mm Ø to


100mm Ø.
(8) Measure the inside diameter of the reference hole.
Note: It must be correctly measured to within 1/1000 by means
of a dial type comparator for measuring cylindricity.( Dial
test indicator).

NM210-00548

(9) Move the spindle axis to the center of the reference hole.
(Perform the alignment operation. “Clock” the ring gauge to find
the center.The reading on the dial test indicator should be less
than 4µ).
Note: The precision of all measurements depends on the
precision of this alignment.
(10) Prepare the calibration measurement program.
- The same as for the general measurement program, press the
menu key CALIBR., then prepare the program.
(11) Enter the X, Y coordinates of the spindle axis in the X and Y
columns of the WPC unit by using the menu keys; WPC
SEARCH and TEACH on the PROGRAM display.
(12) Mount the Probe in the spindle.
(13) In manual mode, move the axes in order to place the point of
the stylus in contact with top of the Ring gauge.
- Move the Z axis slowly until the contact light (MMS) lights.

4-82
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Contact light

D735P0069

(14) Enter the Z coordinate of the spindle in the Z column of the


WPC unit using the menu keys WPC SEARCH and TEACH on
the PROGRAM display.
(15) Select the automatic operation mode and start the calibration
measurement program, which causes the measurement to take
place, after which the Probe is returned to the magazine.
- Thus, the correction data is automatically entered in the
parameters (L1 to L4).

4-83
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Example of calibration measurement program


UNo. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI-MODE MULTI-FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-
Y
0 FC 50. 0 OFF
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z 4
1 WPC-0 € € 0 ó 0
UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-φ No. U.SKIP $
2 MMS T. SENS 5
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 CAL ì ì ö 0 ú ÷
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE
3 END 0 0

No. Item Description


Specify the X and Y coordinates of the workpiece zero point (Basic coordinates) in the
X, Y machine coordinate system.
- Coordinates of the center of the Ring gauge entered by operation (3).
Specify the Z coordinates of the workpiece zero point (Basic coordinates) in the
Z machine coordinate system.
- Coordinates of the top of the Ring gauge entered by operation (7).
Specify the coordinates of the center of the hole based on the workpiece zero point
(Basic coordinates).
X, Y
- In this example, 0 because the workpiece zero point equals to the center of the Ring
gauge.
Specify the depth to which the point of stylus is inserted in to the Ring gauge in order to
Z
make the measurement.
Specify the measurement value of the inside diameter of the reference hole.
D/L
- Inside diameter of the reference hole, measured by operation (2).
K Feed distance at skip speed (K = 2 to 5)

Note 1: These corrections are essential data for ensuring the


deviation of the system by the Probe. The precision of
other measurements are influenced by the precision of the
positioning of the machine itself, and of this calibration
measurement.
Note 2: The calibration measurement is not necessary every time
the Probe is used, but it must! be made when the Probe is
used for the first time or if the stylus is removed or
replaced.!

4-84
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Type of measurement
Select the type of measurement for the deviation of the coordinates
system. The six types of measurement available are described in the
following sentences 1 to 6:

Measurement of the reference surface


The measurement of the reference surface is of three types: X, Y and
Z.
- X reference face (X-FACE)
- Y reference face (Y-FACE)
- Z reference face (Z-FACE)
X reference face
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 X-FACE x1 y1 z1 0 rx
: No Data can be set here.

4-85
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
WPC-X
x1 Machine zero point

rx WPC-Y
Workpiece zero point

Surface to be y1
measured X Rapid feed (G00)
Skip feed
Measurement (Measurement movement)
start point

x1, y1, z1: Coordinates of measurement


ATC position start point based on the work-
piece zero point
WPC-Z rx: Distance from workpiece zero
point to X surface (Dimension
INITIAL-Z shown on drawing)
WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates (Workpiece
Workpiece zero point zero point coordinates in the
machine coordinates system)
z1

Measurement
start point M3P338

Fig.-2 X reference face

[Measurement movement]

Movement to the initial point above


the measurement start point ATC for feeler

Before INITIAL-Z
measurement Movement to
measurement
start point
Rapid feed (G00)
Surface of
measurement X Skip feed
Measurement

Movement to the ATC position,


Movement to the then execution of ATC
initial point above
the measurement
After start point
measurement

Surface of
measurement X
Return to the measurement
start point
M3P339

4-86
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Note 1: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the X coordinate
of the measurement surface is equal to the coordinate entered
in rx when the Probe is moved to the initial point .
Note 2: The direction in which the measurement movement is made
from the measurement start point depends on x1 and rx.

rx
x1

Workpiece zero point


x1 < rx
The measurement movement is executed in +X
from the measurement start point.
X
– + Measurement
start point

x1
rx

Workpiece zero point The measurement movement is executed in –X


x1 > rx from the measurement start point.

Measurement
X start point
– +

M3P340

Y reference face
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 Y-FACE x1 y1 z1 0 ry
: No Data can be set here.

The movement is, in principle, identical to that for the X reference


face. ry signifies the distance of the workpiece zero point on the Y
surface (dimension shown on the drawing), in other words, the
distance of the deviation of the Y basic coordinate.

4-87
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Z reference face
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 Z-FACE x1 y1 z1 0 rz
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X
Machine zero point

x1
WPC-Y
Workpiece
zero point
y1 Rapid feed (G00)
Measurement Skip feed
start point (Measurement movement)
Machine zero point

x1, y1, z1: Coordinates of measurement


start point based on the work-
WPC-Z piece zero point
rz: Distance from workpiece zero
point to Z surface (Dimension
INITIAL-Z shown on drawing)
Workpiece
zero point WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates (Workpiece
z1 zero point coordinates in the
rz machine coordinates system)
Measurement
start point

M3P341

Fig -3 Z reference face

4-88
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[Measurement movement]

Movement to the initial point above ATC for feeler


the measurement start point

INITIAL-Z
Movement to the
Before measurement start
measurement point
z1
Measurement Rapid feed (G00)
Skip feed
Z measurement surface

Movement to the ATC position,


then execution of ATC

INITIAL-Z
After Movement to the
initial point above
measurement the measurement
start point
z1
Movement to the measurement start

Z measurement surface
M3P342

Note: The Z basic coordinate is corrected so that the Z coordinate of


the measurement surface is equal to the coordinate entered in
rz, when the Probe is moved to the initial point .

4-89
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Measurement of groove center
The measurement from groove center is available in two types
according to whether the direction of the groove width is on the X
axis or the Y axis.
- Groove center-X (X-GRV)
- Groove center-Y (Y-GRV)

Groove center-X
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 X-GRV x1 y1 z1 0 l k
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X
Machine zero point

x1
WPC-Y
Workpiece
zero point Rapid feed (G00)
y1 Skip feed

l Machine zero point x1: Distance of the workpiece zero


point to the center of the groove on
X (Dimension shown on drawing)
ATC position
y1, z1: Y and Z cordinates of the meas-
WPC-Z urement start point based on the
workpiece zero point
k
INITIAL-Z l: Width of groove
Workpiece
zero point k: Feed distance at skip speed
z1 WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of
the workpiece zero point in the
machine coordinates system)

l
M3P343

Fig -4 Groove center-X

4-90
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[Measurement movement]
ATC for feeler

Movement to the initial point above


Movement to the
measurement the measurement start point
INITIAL-Z
start point
Before Measurement of
another side of the
measurement groove width Measurement of one side of the groove width

z1 Rapid feed (G00)

Skip feed
k k

Movement to the ATC position, then


execution of ATC
INITIAL-Z
Movement to the initial point
After
measurement

z1
Movement to the measure-
ment start point
k
M3P344

Note: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the coordinate of


the center of the groove to be measured is equal to the
coordinate entered in x1 when the Probe is moved to the initial
point .

Groove center-Y
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 Y-GRV x1 y1 z1 0 l k
: No Data can be set here.

The movement is, in principle, identical to that for the center of


groove-X.
y1 signifies the distance in Y from the workpiece zero point to the
center of the groove width (dimension marked on the drawing), in
other words, the distance of the deviation of the Y basic coordinate.

4-91
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measurement of center of projection width

The measurement of the center of the projection width is available in


two types according to whether the direction of the width of the
projection is on the X axis or on the Y axis.
Projection width in the X axis (X-STP)
Projection width in the Y axis (Y-STP)

Projection width on X axis


SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 X-STP x1 y1 z1 0 l k
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X
Machine zero point
x1
WPC-Y
Rapid feed (G00)
Workpiece
zero point Skip feed
y1

Machine zero point x1: Distance of the workpiece zero


l point at the center of the
projection on X (Dimension
ATC position shown on drawing)
y1, z1: Y and Z coordinates of the meas-
WPC-Z
urement start point based on the
workpiece zero point
INITIAL-Z l: Width of projection
k: Feed distance at skip speed
Workpiece z1 WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of
zero point the workpiece zero point in the
machine coordinates system)
k l

M3P345

Fig.-5 Projection width on X axis

4-92
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[Measurement movement]

Movement to the measurement start point ATC for feeler

Initial point
Measurement of Measurement of one side of the projection
Before
another side of the
measurement projection
z1
Rapid feed (G00)
k k Skip feed

Movement to the ATC position,


then execution of ATC

INITIAL-Z
After
measurement
Movement to the measurement start point

z1

k
M3P346

Note: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the coordinate of


the center of the projection width to be measured is equal to
the coordinate entered in x1 when the Probe is moved to the
initial point .

Projection width on Y axis


SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 Y-STP x1 y1 z1 0 l k
: No Data can be set here.

The movement is, in principle, identical to that for the projection


width on the X axis.
y1 signifies the distance on Y from the workpiece zero point to the
center of the projection width (dimension shown on the drawing)
which serves the distance of deviation of the Y basic coordinate.

4-93
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measurement of bore center (XY-HOL)


The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected by entering the
coordinates of the bore center in the workpiece coordinate system and
also the bore diameter.
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 XY- x1 y1 z1 0 d k
HOL
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X
Machine zero point
x1
WPC-Y
Workpiece
zero point

y1

Rapid feed (G00)


Machine zero point
d
Skip feed

WPC-Z

x1, y1: Distance of workpiece zero point at


INITIAL-Z boring center on X and Y
Workpiece
zero point (Dimension shown on drawing)
z1 z1: Z coordinate of the measurement
start point based on the workpiece
zero point
d: Boring diameter
k k k: Feed distance at skip speed
d WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates
(Coordinates of the workpiece zero
point in the machine coordinates
system)

M3P347

Fig.-6 Measurement of bore center

4-94
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

[Measurement movement]
Movement to the initial point above
the measurement start point ATC for feeler
Movement to the
measurement start point, Movement to the
then measurement measurement INITIAL-Z
movement and start point
Before Measurement of one side
on Y axis
of inside diameter
measurement
z1
Rapid feed (G00)
Measurement of another
side of inside diameter Skip feed
k k

Movement to the ATC


position, then execution
of ATC

INITIAL-Z

After Movement to the initial point


measurement

z1
Movement from the measurement
surface on X to the measurement
start point
M3P348

Note: The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected so that the X and
Y coordinates of the boring center to be measured are equal to
the coordinates x1 and y1 respectively when the feeler is
moved to the initial point .

4-95
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measurement of boss center (XY-BOS)

The correction of the basic coordinates X and Y are done by entering


the distance of the workpiece zero point at the boss center in X and Y
and also the diameter of the boss.
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 XY-BOS x1 y1 z1 0 d k
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X Machine zero point

x1
WPC-Y
Workpiece
zero point Rapid feed (G00)

Skip feed
y1

x1, y1: Distance of workpiece zero point at


boss center on X and Y (Dimension
Machine zero point
shown on drawing)
z1: Z coordinate of the measurement
start point based on the workpiece
zero point
WPC-Z
d: Boss diameter
k: Feed distance at skip speed
INITIAL-Z
WPC-X, Y, Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of
the workpiece zero point in the
Workpiece z1
machine coordinates system)
zero point

k d k

M3P349

Fig.-7 Mesurement of boss center

4-96
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
[Measurement movement]

Movement to the measurement start point


ATC for feeler

Movement to INITIAL-Z
the measurement Measurement of one side
Before Measurement of
start point, then of boss
another side of boss
measurement measurement
movement and
on Y axis
Rapid feed (G00)

k k Skip feed

Movement to the ATC position,


then execution of ATC

After Movement of the measurement surface


measurement on Y axis to measurement start point

M3P350

Note: The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected so that the X and
Y coordinates of the boss center to be measured are equal to
the coordinates x1 and y1 respectively at the time of the
movement of the Probe to the initial point .

4-97
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measurement of workpiece inclination (XYthCNR)


The X and Y basic coordinates and the inclination of the workpiece
coordinates system are corrected by specifying the workpiece zero
point at the corner of the workpiece to be measured.
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 XYthCNR x1 y1 z1 0 r
: No Data can be set here.

WPC-X
Machine zero point

x1

WPC-Y

WPC-th
P3
P2
y1 Rapid feed (G00)
Workpiece
zero point P1 Skip feed
r
Measurement
start point Machine zero point

x1, y1, z1: Coordinates of the measurement


start point with relation to workpiece
zero point
r: Distance from P1 to P2
WPC-Z WPC-X, Y, Z, th: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of
the workpiece zero point in the
machine coordinates system and
the workpiece inclination angle)
Workpiece
zero point INITIAL-Z

z1

M3P351

Fig.-8 Measurement of workpiece inclination

4-98
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Direction of movement of the Probe


The axial movement direction for measurement of inclination of the
workpiece is of four types which are determined automatically
according to preset data.
- Direction of movement of the probe on the basis of the position of
the workpiece zero point and also the content of the data.
Article X Y Z 4 R X Y 4 R
Data x1 > 0 y1 > 0 r > 0 x1 < 0 y1 > 0 r < 0

P2
P1 P1
P2

P3
Measurement
surface Measurement
P3 surface

Corner where a P3
workpiece zero
Measurement point is located Measurement
surface surface
P3

P2 P1
P1 P2

M3P352

Article X Y Z 4 R X Y Z 4 R
Data x1 > 0 y1 < 0 r > 0 x1 < 0 y1 < 0 r < 0

Note: In types to above, the positions related to the points P1


and P2 depend on the sign of r.

4-99
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Measurement movement according to type ì


Measurement at P1, P2 Measurement at P3 After measurement

Movement to the ATC


Movement position, then execution
ATC for feeler of ATC
to the initial
Movement to the initial Movement to the Movement to the point above
point above P1 initial point above P3 initial point above P2 P3

Movement INITIAL-Z
to P1, then Movement to P2,
Movement to the initial
measurement then measurement
point above P1

z1 z1 z1

Movement to P3,
then measurement M3P353

Note: The X, Y and th basic coordinates are corrected so that the


coordinates X and Y of the corner obtained by
measurement serve as workpiece zero point when the
Probe is moved to the initial point .
Example: Correction of the workpiece zero point for the
workpiece placed as shown below.

Machine
zero point
Machine
zero point
y500 z500
(Actual value 501.0)

Workpiece 3°

x700 Table
Workpiece
zero point (Actual value 700.1)

M3P354

This is a part of program corresponding to MMS.


UNo. UNIT ADD. X Y th Z 4
WPC
1 WPC-0 -700. -500. 0. -500. 0.
UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-φ No U.SKIP $
2 MMS T.SENS 5. 0.
SNo. PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 XYth CNR 10. -10. -10. 0 100

4-100
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The execution of the MMS unit has the effect of correcting the basic
coordinates as follows.
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z 4
1 WPC-0 -700.1 -501. 3. -500. 0.

Thus the workpiece zero point is located at the real corner.

Positioning of other measuring points P2, P3 other than the measurement


starting point P1

P2: Position with distance r and angle with relation to P1


P3: Position obtained by turning P1 in a counter-clockwise direction (to
90 +2 ) around the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0)
L: Maximum measurement movement

90°
α θ
P3
P2 θ
α
P3
Workpiece P1
zero point r
Workpiece
zero point P1 P2
M3P355

Fig.-9 Positioning relation of measuring points (P2, P3) and measurement start
point (p1)

Precautions
The measurement of the inclination of the workpiece requires that the
workpiece zero point to be located at the corner of the workpiece and
that the angle of the corner be 90°. If these conditions are not
fulfilled, the followings can occur.
(1) When the workpiece zero point has been specified at a point
distant from the corner of the workpiece, it is possible that the
Probe will not come into contact with the workpiece or that the
Probe stylus will be damaged.
(2) If the angle of the corner to be measured is not 90° , it is possible
that the Probe stylus will be damaged. Moreover, the correction of
the coordinates is not made correctly for the measured corner.

4-101
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Risk of collision with


the workpiece at the time
of positioning on Z axis. θ ≠ 90°

P1 P2

M3P356

4-102
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

MMS EXAMPLE

4-103
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-104
TITLE : MMS UNIT

1 XY HOLE 4 X STP,Y GRV 20

40 2 XY BOSS 5 XYØ CNR 8


3 X,Y,Z FACE

1 1
Ø50 Ø30

35

4-105
2
(MMS)

150

32

28
3 4
MAZAK MEASURING SYSTEM

3,4
30
5 5

20
140
PROG NO. 200
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

M.M.S. Example

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 1 -523. -289. 0. -411. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No. U.SKIP $


2 MMS T.SENS. 5. 0 *
SNo.PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 BORE 50. 115. -8. * * 30. 5.

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


3 WPC- 2 -563. -333. 0. -411. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No. U.SKIP $


4 MMS T.SENS. 5. 0 *
SNo.PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 BOSS 50. 115. -5. * * 50. 5.

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


5 WPC- 3 -573. -383. 0. -419. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No. U.SKIP $


6 MMS T.SENS. 5. 0 *
SNo.PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 X-FACE -10. 50. -10. * 0. * *
2 Y-FACE 70. -40. -10. * -30. * *
3 Z-FACE 70. -40. -10. * -30. * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


7 WPC- 4 -503. -383. 0. -419. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No. U.SKIP $


8 MMS T.SENS. 5. 0 *
SNo.PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 X-STP 0. 0. -8. * * 140. 5.
2 Y-GRV 0. 28. -8. * * 32. 5.

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


9 WPC- 5 -573. -413. 0. -419. *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No. U.SKIP $


10 MMS T.SENS. 5. 0 *
SNo.PTN X Y Z 4 R D/L K
1 XY CNR 20. -10. -8. * 100. * *

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4


ANGLE
11 END 0 0 1 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-106
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4th AXIS PROGAMMING

4-107
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-108
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

FOURTH AXIS PROGRAMMING

The 4th axis, (also referred to as a NC rotary table), is simply another axis,
additional to the standard axes, X, Y & Z. The X, Y & Z axes, though, are linear
axes, and the 4th axis is a rotational axis, - rotating about the Y axis for a
horizontal machining centre, and usually rotating about the X axis for a vertical
machining centre.

If this 4th axis is to be used purely as a positioning device, then the INDEX unit
can be selected to program this operation.

If the 4th axis is to feed from one position to another, (presumably with a tool in
contact with, - cutting the component), then the 4th axis programming commands
must be made within the MANUAL PROGRAM unit.
NB. The Manual Program unit can also be selected to (rapid) position the 4th
axis instead of the alternative Index unit.

Only G00 and G01 can be programmed for the 4th axis, - circular interpolation
(G02/G03) and cutter radius compensation (G41/G42) cannot be applied to this
axis.

The 4th axis command can be programmed in the same block as the other axes to
move simultaneously with the other axes.
If a 4th axis feed movement is programmed in a block without other axis
movements, then the unit of the F code feed rate is in degrees/minute (in G94
mode).
If a 4th axis feed movement is programmed in a block with other axis
movements, then the unit of the F code feed rate is in millimetres (inches)/minute
(in G94 mode).

The problems involved when programming the 4th axis are not always
related to the programmed coordinates, but more commonly related, instead,
to the programmed feed rates.
(NB. That said, if the machining involves complicated multi-axis simultaneous
programming, it would be better to output a CAM generated program in EIA/ISO
format to the Mazatrol CNC from a PC based system).
Although a milling cutter may be positioned in the Z axis prior to 4th axis
movement, the control does not ‘know‘ at what diameter, (or at what radial
distance above the centre of rotation of the 4th axis), the tool is machining.

4-109
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
This distance above the centre of rotation, (where machining occurs), governs the
actual circumferential distance traveled by the 4th axis (/tool) during machining.
See reference drawing M32PRG24 for a visual reference.

CALCULATION OF FEED RATE FOR INDEPENDENT 4TH AXIS


MOVEMENT

Because the control is unaware of the true distance of the cutter above the centre
of rotation, the programmer, knowing this distance, and therefore the true
circumferential distance traveled, can thus calculate a suitable feed rate to
program.

IF D = Diameter of machining (mm or inch)


A = Incremental angular distance of machining (deg)
Ft = Feed/tooth (mm/tooth or in/tooth)
N = Number of teeth on cutter
S = RPM of cutter
Fl = Linear feed rate (mm/min or in/min)
C = Circumferential distance traveled (mm or inch)
T = Time to machine feature (min)
F = Programmed feed rate (deg/min)

Refer to reference drawing M32PRG24 for general information.

Circumferential distance traveled from P to Q, C = xDxA


360
Linear feed rate required, Fl = Ft x N x S

Time required to feed from P to Q, T = C/Fl

Programmed feed rate, F = A = A x Fl = A x Fl x 360


T C xDxA

= Fl x 360
xD

EXAMPLE

If Ft = 0.1 , N = 3 , S = 400 , D = 300.0

4-110
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Then Fl = 0.1 x 3 x 400 = 120.0mm

F = 120 x 360 = 46. degrees/min


3.142 x 300

CALCULATION OF FEED RATE FOR COMBINED 4TH & LINEAR


AXES MOVEMENTS

Because the control is unaware of the true distance of the cutter above the centre
of rotation, the control makes certain, (incorrect), assumptions in the calculation
of the resultant circumferential distance traveled.
The programmer, knowing the true radial distance of machining, and therefore of
the true resultant circumferential distance traveled, can thus calculate a suitable
feed rate to program to match the assumed distance traveled as calculated by the
control.

IF D = Diameter of machining (mm)


A = Incremental angular distance of machining (deg)
L = Incremental linear distance of machining (mm)
Ft = Feed/tooth (mm/tooth)
N = Number of teeth on cutter
S = RPM of cutter
Fl = Linear feed rate (mm/min)
C = Actual circumferential distance traveled (mm)
Rc = Assumed resultant distance traveled by the control (mm)
Ra = Actual resultant distance traveled (mm)
T = Time to machine feature (min)
F = Programmed feed rate (mm/min)

4-111
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
Refer to the drawing for general information.

4th AXIS MOVEMENT ONLY


Q

A
D

COMBINED 4th and LINEAR


AXIS MOVEMENT P

ASSUMED DISTANCE TRAVELLED


BY THE CONTROL
D
Amm
A
Q P 2 2 Lmm
L+A

ACTUAL DISTANCE TRAVELLED


C mm

L L mm
Q 2
L+C
2

The control assumes the circumferential distance traveled by the 4th axis (/tool)
to be the angular distance value, but with a distance unit of mm, in metric mode,
(and not degrees) i.e. A mm
This dimension is used by the control to form one side of a right-angled triangle,
where the adjacent side is the known distance traveled in the linear axis. I.e. L mm
The control can then calculate the assumed resultant distance traveled. I.e. Rc
mm

Assumed resultant distance traveled, Rc = L2 + A2

Actual circumferential distance traveled, C = xDxA


360

Actual resultant distance traveled, Ra = L2 + C2

Linear feed rate required, Fl = Ft x N x S

Time required to feed from P to Q, T = Ra/Fl

4-112
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

F1 X L2 + A2
Programmed feed rate, F = Rc =
T Ra

F1 X L2 + A2

= L2 + (S x D x A) 2
( 360 )
EXAMPLE

If Ft = 0.1 , N = 3 , S = 400 , D = 300.0 , L = 35.0 , A = 80.0


Then Fl = 0.1 x 3 x 400 = 120.0mm

120 X 352 + 802


= 49. mm/min
352 + (3.142 x 300 x 80) 2

( 360 )

NOTE

If programming in imperial, the control assumes the circumferential distance


traveled by the 4th axis (/tool) to be the angular distance value x 0.1, but with a
distance unit of inch (and not degrees). I.e. A/10 inch

The imperial feed rate formula is therefore:

F1 X L2 + (A/ 10)2
F= in/min

L2 + (S x D x A) 2
( 360 )

4-113
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

The drawing illustrates a typical Horizontal Machine situation.

H M/C SET UP
DEVELOPED VIEW

Y0
300 DIA 0
360

Nominal Cutter
15 Width
25 mm

0
260

210
175

Y0 0
180

0
0 90
100
VIEW LOOKING
ON TOP FACE 0
100

0 X0 0
180 0

0
Z0

0 0
260
0
270

The Mazatrol Program illustrates the programming method for a Horizontal


machining centre.

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


2 MANU PRO E-MILL 25. B
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 90 X 0. Y 175. Z 50. 4 0. 400 M38
2 Z 3. M3
3 M8
4 1 94 Z -15. F 40
5 4 100. F 46
6 Y 210. 4 180. F 49
7 Y 175. 4 260.
8 4 360. F 46
9 Z 3. F 500
10 0 Z 50.

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 * *

4-114
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
The drawing illustrates a typical Vertical Machine situation.

V M/C SET UP
DEVELOPED VIEW
0
360

VIEW LOOKING
175
ONTO 4th AXIS
FACE PLATE
25 mm Nominal 0
Cutter Width Y0
X0 0 260
0 Z0

0
0 0 180
300 DIA

90 270
0 0
100 260

0
100

0
15 180
210

0 0

X0

The Mazatrol Program illustrates the programming method for a Vertical


machining centre.
UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 0

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


2 MANU PRO E-MILL 25. B
SNo.G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 90X 175. Y 0. Z 50. 4 0. 400
2 Z 3. M3
3 M8
4 1 94 Z -15. F 40
5 4 100. F 46
6 X 210. 4 180. F 49
7 X 175. 4 260.
8 4 360. F 46
9 Z 3. F 500
10 0 Z 50.

UNo. UNIT CONTI .NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0 * *

4-115
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-116
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.26

4-117
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-118
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-119
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.26

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALUMINUM 25. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 3. * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 120. ? ? XUN * 3. 84. 782 0.436 8
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -130. 80. 130. -80.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


3 LINE OUT 20. 20. 25. 4 * 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 32. ? ? CW G01 9.7 * 102 0.397 8
F 2 E-MILL 32. A ? ? CW G01 * * 162 0.416 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE -125. -75.
2 LINE -125. 75. R 35.
3 LINE 125. 75.
4 LINE 125. ? UP
5 CCW 125. ? 50. 155. 0. DOWN
6 LINE 125. -65.
7 LINE 0. -75.
8 LINE -125. -75.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH CHMF FIN-Z FIN-R


4 LINE LFT 10. 10. 25. 4 * 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 32. ? ? * G01 9.4 * 113 0.463 8
F 2 E-MILL 32. A ? ? * G01 * * 162 0.416 8
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE -100. -75.
2 LINE -100. 75.

UNo. UNIT CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM WAL DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL
5 BORE T2 110. 12. 1. 2 2 80. 50. 0.5 5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 DRILL 40. 40. 51. 0. 100 DRILT12. 65 0.272 8
2 E-MILL 32. 79.5 51. 40. CCW 0 T19.2 91 0.294 8
3 E-MILL 32. A 109.5 12. 79.5 CCW 2 T19.2 117 0.574 8
4 BOR BAR 110. 110. 12. CYCLE1 0. 2 T15.25 110 0.227 8
5 CHF-C 25. 110. 12. 80. 38. * C 0.5 400 0.4 8
6 CHF-C 25. 999. 0. 110. 12. * C 1. 300 0.2 8
7 BOR BAR 80. 80. 51. CYCLE1 12. 0 T 0.25 192 0.14 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

4-120
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


6 DRILLING 6.8 20. 0.1
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 12. 7. * * * 90° * 75 0.1 8
2 DRILL 6.8 6.8 20. 0. 100 DRILT 2.04 65 0.177 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR 0. 85. 50. -90. -90. 25. 170. 0 5 2 0 0 0
2 LIN -10. -110. 50. -90. * 25. * 0 5 * * 0 0

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-ø PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


7 TAPPING M8. 8. 1.25 12. 0.6 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 12. 8.118 * * * 90° * 75 0.1 8
2 DRILL 6.8 6.8 18. 0. 100 DRILT 2.07 65 0.179 8
3 TAP M8. 8. 12. * * FIX P1.25 40 1.25 8
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 CIR -12. 0. 0. 22.5 * 47.5 * * 8 * * * 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


8 END 0 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0. * *

4-121
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-122
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.27

4-123
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-124
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-125
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No.27

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALY STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 2. * 4 * 0.6 *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 63. ? ? XBI-S * 1.4 44.1 128 0.88 8
F 2 F-MILL 63. ? ? XUN * * 44.1 143 0.56
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 125. 100.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


3 SUB PRO 28 *

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


4 END 0 0 1 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-126
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE 28-SUB PROGRAM

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALY STL 50. 0 OFFSET TYPE * * *
OFS X Y ANGLE Z
1 100. 25. 0. 0.
2 60. 70. 45. 0.
3 30. 40. 45. 0.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF


1 DRILLING 20. 15. 0.5
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 20 0.08
2 DRILL 20. 20. 15. 0. 100 DRILT10. 20 0.204
3 CHF-C 16. 999. 0. 20. 15. * C 0.5 68 0.2
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT NOM- MAJOR-ø PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP


2 TAPPING UN 3E-16 9.525 1.588 14. 2.3 0
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No.HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 12.75 * * * 90° * 20 0.08 8
2 DRILL 8.2 8.2 19.76 0. 100 PCK1T 4.1 20 0.116 8
3 TAP UN 3E-16 9.525 14. * * FIX P1.588 10 1.588
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 SQR 0. -10. -15. 0. 90. 20. 30. 0 2 2 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 1 0 1 * * * * * *

4-127
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-128
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No 29

4-129
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-130
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-131
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE 29

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALY STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 STEP 6. 6. * 4 4 0.6 0.6
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 2.7 8.4 56 0.108
F 2 E-MILL 12. B ? ? CW G01 * 8.4 56 0.208
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -75. -75. 75. 75.
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
2 LINE -70. 0.
3 LINE -68. 40.
4 FIG-SH * * * * * 3 *
5 LINE -68. 40.
6 LINE -68. 50.
7 CW -52. 50. 8.
8 LINE -52. 40.
9 CCW -28. 40. 12.
10 REP-EN * * * * * * *
11 LINE 52. 50.
12 CW 68. 50. 8.
13 LINE 68. 40.
14 LINE 70. 0.
15 CW -70. 0. 70.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 0 1 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-132
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLES
No 30 - 35

4-133
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-134
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-135
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Program Example No 30

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
2 INDEX 0. 0. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


3 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
4 INDEX 0. 60. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


5 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
6 INDEX 0. 120. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


7 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
8 INDEX 0. 180. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


9 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
10 INDEX 0. 240. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


11 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE TURN DIR.
12 INDEX 0. 300. NEAR DIR.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


13 SUB PRO 31 *

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


14 END 0 1 0 *

4-136
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Program Example No 31
(Sub Program)

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 FACE MIL 0. 2.5 * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 63. ? ? XBI-S * 2.5 44.1 140 1.08
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -25.125 -25. 25.125 25.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH BTM WAL PRE-DIA PRE-DEP CHMF WAL
2 BK-CBORE 38. 5.45 2 2 32. 52.45 0. 3
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No .HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 25 0.09
2 DRILL 26. 26. 53.45 0. 100 DRIL T13. 25 0.269
3 BOR BAR 31. 31. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.5 42 0.168
4 BOR BAR 32. 32. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 52 0.13
5 B-B BAR 38. 38. 5.45 32. 52.45 2 T 3. 42 0.179
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

4-137
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Program Example No 32
Showing 4th Axis Incremental Movement

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


2 SUB PRO 33 * 6

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 *

Program Example No 33
(Sub Program)

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


1 MANU PRO F-MILL 63. 1
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 60.

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


2 MANU PRO CTR DR 20. 2
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 -60.

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


3 MANU PRO DRILL 30. 3
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 60.
2

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


4 MANU PRO BOR BAR 32. 4
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 -60.

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


5 MANU PRO BOR BAR 38. 5
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 60.

4-138
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Program Example No 33
(Sub Program) cont.

UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM-ø No.


6 MANU PRO B-B BAR 38. 6
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 0 91 4 -60.

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


1 FACE MIL 0. 2.5 * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 63. ? ? XBI-S * 2.5 44.1 140 1.08
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -25.125 -25. 25.125 25.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH BTM WAL PRE-DIA PRE-DEP CHMF WAL
2 BK-CBORE 38. 5.45 2 2 32. 52.45 0. 3
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No .HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 25 0.09
2 DRILL 26. 26. 53.45 0. 100 DRIL T13. 25 0.269
3 BOR BAR 31. 31. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.5 42 0.168
4 BOR BAR 32. 32. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 52 0.13
5 B-B BAR 38. 38. 5.45 32. 52.45 2 T 3. 42 0.179
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

4-139
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

Program Example No 34
For Indexer with External Control Unit

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT


2 SUB PRO 35 * 6

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 1 0 *

Program Example No 35
(Sub Program)

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CBN STL 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT No. M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8


1 M CODE 45

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R


2 FACE MIL 0. 2.5 * 3 * 0. *
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 F-MILL 63. ? ? XBI-S * 2.5 44.1 140 1.08
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR -25.125 -25. 25.125 25.

UNo. UNIT DIA DEPTH BTM WAL PRE-DIA PRE-DEP CHMF WAL
3 BK-CBORE 38. 5.45 2 2 32. 52.45 0. 3
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No .HOLE-ø HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
1 CTR DR 20. 10. * * * 90° * 25 0.09
2 DRILL 26. 26. 53.45 0. 100 DRIL T13. 25 0.269
3 BOR BAR 31. 31. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 2.5 42 0.168
4 BOR BAR 32. 32. 53.45 CYCLE1 0. 0 T 0.5 52 0.13
5 B-B BAR 38. 38. 5.45 32. 52.45 2 T 3. 42 0.179
FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R
1 PT 0. 0. 0. * * * * * * * 0 0 0

UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


4 END 1 0 * * * * * * *

4-140
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No 36

4-141
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-142
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-143
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

PROGRAM EXAMPLE No. 36

UNo.MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 ALUMINUM 50. 0 OFF * * *

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y ANGLE Z 4


1 WPC- 0 0. 0. 0. 0. *

UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF
2 POCKET 4. 4. * 4 4 0.6 0.6 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-ø No APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 E-MILL 8. B ? ? CCW G01 3.4 5.6 100 0.128
F 2 E-MILL 8. B ? ? CCW G01 * 5.6 100 0.208
FIG PTN X Y R/ANGLE I J P CNR
1 LINE -19.05 0.
2 LINE -31.75 0.
3 CW ? ? 6.35 -31.75 6.35 R 88.9
4 CW ? ? 7.62 6.35 88.9
5 LINE ? ?
6 CW ? ? 6.35 25.4 50.8 R -25.4
7 CW ? ? 5.1 44.45 0. R 63.5
8 CCW ? ? 9.53 0. 0.
9 LINE -19.05 0.

UNo. UNIT CONTI.NUMBER ATC X Y Z 4 ANGLE


3 END 0 0 1 0. 0. 0. * * *

4-144
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

DATA I/O (Input/Output)

4-145
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

4-146
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

DATA I/O - (INPUT/OUTPUT)

1. Press F1 key, select DATA IN/OUT from the menu shown below.

2. Select the method of data transfer.

CMT I/O- Enables transfer via RS232C interface.(using Mazak Micro Disk)
TAPE I/O-Enables transfer via RS232c interface (using paper tape punch/reader
or personal computer).
DNC I/O- Enables transfer via RS232C interface with an external CPU.
HARD DISK-Enables transfer from NC memory to PC hard disk of the Mazatrol
Fusion 640 control.
FLOPPY-Enables transfer(I/O) to a standard Dos format 3.5 inch floppy disk.
CARD- Enables transfer (I/O) to a standard PCMCIA Flash disk.

4-147
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

CARD OPERATION

The location of the I/C Memory card


interface can be found to the right hand
side of the NC monitor as shown on the
picture to the left.

To transfer data onto the card, insert the


card into the slot and follow the procedure
as explained below.

3. Select CARD from the menu shown below.

PUSH

4-148
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
4. Press the menu DIR. SELECT

PUSH

5. Select a directory by positioning the cursor onto the directory name or type in a
new directory name (Max. 8 characters), and then press OK to confirm.

PUSH

4-149
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

6. The directory name selected will then be set. Select either LOAD or SAVE
option from the menu keys shown below.

PUSH

4-150
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

7. Select data to be transferred, and then press START. ( If using the SAVE
command, by selecting PROGRAM FILE, a list of the program numbers
within memory can be viewed for ease of selection)

PUSH

NOTE: When using the SAVE command to the selected directory, it is not
possible to add further data to this directory at a later stage. This will result
in the previous data being overwritten !!

4-151
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
FDD OPERATION

1. Select FLOPPY from the menu on the DATA I/O display.

PUSH

2. Press the menu DIR. SELECT

PUSH

4-152
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
3. Select a directory by positioning the cursor onto the directory name or type in a
new directory name (Max. 8 characters), and then press OK to confirm.

PUSH

4. The directory name selected will then be set. Select either LOAD or SAVE
option from the menu keys shown below.

PUSH

4-153
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

5. Select data to be transferred, and then press START. (If using SAVE
command, by selecting PROGRAM FILE, a list of the program numbers
within memory can be viewed for ease of selection)

PUSH

NOTE: When using the SAVE command to the selected directory, it is not
possible to add further data to this directory at a later stage. This will result
in the previous data being overwritten !!

4-154
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
HARD DISK OPERATION

1. Select HARD DISK from the menu on the DATA I/O display.

PUSH

2. Press the menu DIR. SELECT

4-155 PUSH
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

3. A window will appear within the screen.

4. Select a directory by positioning the cursor onto the directory name within the
window, or, type in a new directory name (Max. 8 characters), and then press OK
to confirm.

PUSH

4-156
MAZATROL FUSION 640M
4. The directory name selected will then be set. Select either the LOAD or SAVE
option from the menu keys shown below.

PUSH

5. Select data to be transferred and then press START. (If using the SAVE
command, by selecting PROGRAM FILE, a list of program numbers stored
within the memory can be viewed for ease of selection.

4-157 PUSH
MAZATROL FUSION 640M

NOTE: When using the SAVE command to the selected directory, it is not
possible to add further data to this directory at a later stage. This will result
in the previous data being overwritten !!

The picture below shows the Microsoft Windows ’95 Explorer TM taken from the
FUSION 640T display.
The Directories you create are stored in a directory named “OTHER”. This
directory is stored in a directory called “M_BACKUP” on the hard drive (C:
Drive) of the FUSION 640M’s P.C. side.

WARNING: No attempt should be made to alter or delete this structure.

4-158

You might also like